Toshiba Personal Lift GRT100 User Manual

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY

GRT100 - ∗∗∗D

( Ver. 4.0 )

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

DANGER

•

Current transformer circuit

Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be

opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerous high

voltage.

WARNING

•

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated

is dangerous.

•

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It

takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

•

Fiber optic

Do not view directly with optical instruments.

CAUTION

•

Earth

Earth the earthing terminal of the equipment securely.

CAUTION

•

Operation conditions

Use the equipment within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust as detailed in the

specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

•

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or DC power supply to the equipment, check that they

conform to the equipment ratings.

•

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove the printed circuit board while the DC power to the equipment is on, as

this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

•

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the

supply voltage used and prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

•

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Modification

•

Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction, and any such

modifications will invalidate the warranty.

•

Short-link

Do not remove a short-link which is mounted at the terminal block on the rear of the relay before

⎯ 2 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand voltage, etc., to

reduce.

•

Disposal

When disposing of this product, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.

This product contains a lithium-ion battery, which should be removed at the end-of-life of the

product. The battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local regulations. The

battery can be removed by withdrawing the Signal Processing module (SPM) from the relay case,

and cutting the connecting leads and plastic strap which hold the battery.

⎯ 3 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Contents

Safety Precautions

1. Introduction

2. Application Notes

2.1 Protection Scheme

2.2 Current Differential Protection

2.2.1 Differential Scheme

2.2.2 Stability for CT Saturation during Through-fault Conditions

2.2.3 Matching of CT Secondary Currents

2.2.4 Connection between CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100

2.2.5 Setting

2.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

2.4 Overcurrent Protection

2.5 Thermal Overload Protection

2.6 Frequency Protection

2.7 Overexcitation Protection

2.8 Trip by External Devices

2.9 Tripping Output

2.10 Characteristics of Measuring Elements

2.10.1 Percentage Current Differential Element DIF

2.10.2 High-set Overcurrent Element HOC

2.10.3 Restricted Earth Fault Element REF

2.10.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element OCI and EFI

2.10.5 Definite Time Overcurrent element OC and EF

2.10.6 Thermal Overload Element THR

2.10.7 Frequency Element FRQ

2.10.8 Overexcitation Element V/F

3. Technical Description

3.1 Hardware Description

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules

3.1.2 Transformer Module

3.1.3 Signal Processing Module

3.1.4 Binary Input and Output Module

3.1.5 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module

3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 Input Signals

3.2.2 Binary Output Signals

3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing

3.3.3 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring

⎯ 4 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.3.4 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring

3.3.5 Failure Alarms

3.3.6 Trip Blocking

3.3.7 Setting

3.4 Recording Function

3.4.1 Fault Recording

3.4.2 Event Recording

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

3.5 Metering Function

4. User Interface

4.1 Outline of User Interface

4.1.1 Front Panel

4.1.2 Communication Ports

4.2 Operation of the User Interface

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

4.2.2 Relay Menu

4.2.3 Displaying Records

4.2.4 Displaying the Status

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

4.2.7 Testing

114

118

119

120

4.3 Personal Computer Interface

4.4 Communication Interface

4.4.1 RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring System)

4.4.2 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

4.4.3 IEC 61850 interface

4.5 Clock Function

5. Installation

121

122

5.1 Receipt of Relays

5.2 Relay Mounting

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

5.4 Handling Precautions

5.5 External Connections

6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

6.2 Cautions

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

6.2.1 Safety Precautions

6.2.2 Cautions on Tests

6.3 Preparations

6.4 Hardware Tests

6.4.1 User Interfaces

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

⎯ 5 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5 Function Test

6.5.1 Measuring Element

130

146

148

149

151

153

155

6.5.2 Timer Test

6.5.3 Protection Scheme

6.5.4 Metering and Recording

6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test

6.7 Maintenance

6.7.1 Regular Testing

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules

6.7.4 Resumption of Service

6.7.5 Storage

7. Putting Relay into Service

156

⎯ 6 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix A Block Diagram

157

159

179

181

185

193

199

207

241

247

253

261

267

271

275

287

321

325

331

Appendix B Signal List

Appendix C Variable Timer List

Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List

Appendix E Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation

Appendix F Case Outline

Appendix G External Connections

Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet

Appendix I Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)

Appendix J Return Repair Form

Appendix K Technical Data

Appendix L Setting of REF Element

Appendix M Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

Appendix N Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8

Appendix O IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and Troublehsooting

Appendix P IEC61850: MICS & PICS

Appendix Q Inverse Time Characteristics

Appendix R Failed Module Tracing and Replacement

Appendix S Ordering

„ The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.4.0)

⎯ 7 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

1. Introduction

GRT100 provides high-speed transformer and reactor protection, and realises high dependability

and security for diverse faults such as single-phase faults, multi-phase faults, overload and

over-excitation.

GRT100 is used as a main protection and backup protection of the following transformers and

reactors.

• Two-winding or three-winding power transformers

• Auto-transformers

• Generator-transformer units

• Shunt reactors

GRT100 is designed to provide stability under magnetizing inrush and overexcitation conditions.

GRT100 is available for mixed 1A/5A inputs

GRT100 provides the following metering and recording functions.

• Metering

• Fault records

• Event records

• Disturbance records

GRT100 provides the following human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of stored data.

• Relay front panel:

• Local PC

LCD, LED display and operation keys

• Remote PC

Password protection is provided to change settings. Eight active setting groups are provided. This

allows the user to set one group for normal operating conditions while other groups may be set to

cover alternative operating conditions by binary input using the PLC.

GRT100 can provide the following serial interface ports:

RS232C for a local PC and Relay Setting and Monitoring System (RSM100)

RS485 for a remote PC, and Relay Setting and Monitoring System (RSM100) or Substation

control and Automation System (SAS) with IEC60870-5-103 protocol

Fibre Optic (FO, option) for a remote PC, and Relay Setting and Monitoring System

(RSM100) or Substation control and Automation System (SAS) with IEC60870-5-103

protocol

100BASE-TX, or -FX (option) for Substation control and Automation System (SAS) with

IEC61850 protocol

Another interface IRIG-B port is provided for an external clock connection.

The RS232C port is located on the front panel of the relay. Other ports (RS485, FO, 100BASE-TX

and IRIG-B) are located on the rear of the relay.

Further, the GRT100 provides the following functions.

⎯ 8 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Configurable binary inputs and outputs

Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording, etc.

Automatic supervision

GRT100 has two model series which differ according to the number of three-phase current inputs

for differential protection as follows:

Relay Type and Model

Relay Type:

- Type GRT100; Numerical transformer protection relay

Relay Model:

- Model 100 series; 2 three-phase current inputs, applied to two-winding transformers

• Model 101; 16 binary inputs, 13 binary outputs, 5 binary outputs for tripping

• Model 102; 16 binary inputs, 23 binary outputs, 5 binary outputs for tripping

- Model 200 series; 3 three-phase current inputs, applied to two- and three-winding transformers

• Model 201; 16 binary inputs, 13 binary outputs, 5 binary outputs for tripping

• Model 202; 16 binary inputs, 23 binary outputs, 5 binary outputs for tripping

• Model 203; 15 binary inputs (12-independent), 13 binary outputs, 3 binary outputs for tripping

• Model 204; 15 binary inputs (12-independent), 23 binary outputs, 3 binary outputs for tripping

Model 100 series have 2 three-phase current inputs and can be applied to two-winding

transformers. Model 200 series have 3 three-phase current inputs and can be applied to two- and

three-winding transformers.

⎯ 9 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2. Application Notes

GRT100 is applied to both main protection and backup protection for the following transformers

and reactors:

• Two-winding or three-winding power transformers

• Auto-transformers

• Generator-transformer units

• Shunt reactors

2.1 Protection Scheme

GRT100 provides the following protection schemes with measuring elements in parentheses.

Appendix A shows the block diagrams of the GRT100 series.

• Current differential protection (DIFT)

• Restricted earth fault protection (1REF-3REF)

• Time-overcurrent protection (1OC-3OC, 1OCI-3OCI, 1EF-3EF and 1EFI-3EFI)

• Thermal overload protection (THR)

• Frequency protection (FRQ)

• Overexcitation protection (V/F)

• Trip and/or indication of external devices (Buchholtz relay, pressure or temperature sensing

devices etc.)

The DIFT, provided with DIF and HOC elements and the REF are applied for main protection. For

details, see Sections 2.2, 2.3 and 2.10.

They provide transformer protection coverage as follows:

REF: protection for winding to earth faults of star-winding side

DIF: protection for all internal transformer faults (The DIF can be blocked by 2F or 5F

element.)

HOC: protection for all internal transformer faults, specifically for heavy internal faults,

high-speed operation (The HOC is not blocked by 2F or 5F element. The sensitivity is

set above the estimated maximum inrush current.)

DIF

HOC

REF

For earth fault only

Small

Large

Differential current

The number of measuring elements for the restricted earth fault protection and time-overcurrent

protection is dependent on the relay models.

Figure 2.1.1, 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 show typical application and the relationship between AC inputs and

the measuring elements applied in each model.

⎯ 10 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GRT100

1OC/1OCI

THR

1CT

FRQ

V/F

Calculate 3I

1nCT

1EF/1EFI

1REF

DIFT

2nCT

2CT

2OC/2OCI

2EF/2EFI

Calculate 3I

2REF

Figure 2.1.1 Measuring Elements of Model 100 series

GRT100

1OC/1OCI

FRQ

1CT

THR

Calculate 3I

V/F

1REF

1nCT

3nCT

1EF/1EFI

DIFT

3CT

2nCT

2OC/2OCI

2CT

Calculate 3I

2REF

2EF/2EFI

3OC/3OCI

Calculate 3I

3EF/3EFI

3REF

Figure 2.1.2 Measuring Elements of Model 200 series

GRT100

1OC/1OCI

1CT

2OC/2OCI

2CT

Calculate 3I

FRQ

V/F

Calculate 3I

1nCT

1EF/1EFI

1REF

DIFT

3CT

3OC/3OCI

Figure 2.1.3 Measuring Elements of Model 200 series

⎯ 11 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.2 Current Differential Protection

2.2.1 Differential Scheme

Current differential protection DIFT provides an overall transformer protection deriving phase

current from each transformer winding, calculating the differential current on a per phase basis

and detecting phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults.

The current differential protection is based on Kirchhoff’s first law that the vector summation of

all currents flowing into a protected zone must be zero. Figure 2.2.1.1 shows the principle of

current differential protection. Differential current (id) is the vector summation of all terminal

current of the transformer. The differential current (id=i1+i2) is zero because the current (i1)

equals current (−i2) during a load condition or an external fault. During an internal fault, the

differential current (id) is not zero because the current (i1) does not equal to the current (−i2), and

the DIFT operates.

Primary

Secondary

Transformer

id=i1+i2

Differential current

detection

DIFT

Figure 2.2.1.1 Current Differential Protection

Scheme logic

Figure 2.2.1.2 shows the scheme logic of the current differential protection. Current differential

element DIFT comprises sub-elements HOC, DIF, 2F and 5F which operate for differential

current on a per phase basis.

Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix M.

HOC is a high-set overcurrent element operating for differential current. It provides high-speed

protection for heavy internal faults.

DIF is a percentage restraining element and has dual restraining characteristics, a weak restraint in

the small current region and a strong restraint in the large current region, to cope with erroneous

differential current which may be caused due to output imbalance of the CTs in case of an external

fault. (For the characteristics, see Section 2.10.)

The DIF output signal can be blocked when the 2F or 5F elements detect second harmonic inrush

current during transformer energization or fifth harmonic components during transformer

overexcitation. Blocking is enabled by setting scheme switch [2F-LOCK] or [5F-LOCK] to “ON”.

The following two or three blocking schemes are selectable by scheme switch [DIFTPMD].

“3POR”: When any one phase of the 2F or 5F element operates, tripping by the DIF

element is blocked in all 3 phases. “3POR” is recommended for transformers with

large capacity whose second harmonic component may be low. Its blocking

function is stronger than that of the “1P” or “2PAND” below.

“1P”:

When any phase of the 2F or 5F elements operate, only the corresponding phase

output of the DIF element is blocked.

“2PAND”: Even if 2F or 5F element operates during manetising inrush, the trip by DIF

element is allowed when any two phases or more of DIF element operate.

⎯ 12 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

“2PAND” is recommended for a transformer with small or midium capacity

whose second harmonic component in inrush current is genarally higher than that

of transformer with large capacity. This mode is applicable if [Phase matching] is

set to “Beta”.

Protection by DIF and HOC can perform instantaneous three-phase tripping of up to five breakers.

Any of the five breaker tripping signals DIFT-1 to DIFT-5 are enabled or disabled by the scheme

switch [DIF1] to [DIF5] settings.

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with DIFT-4 and DIFT-5, and perform tripping of up to

three breakers.

DIFT

HOC-A

TRIP

DIFT-1

HOC

374

224

≥1

HOC-B

HOC-C

≥1

DIF1

121 DIF

DIFT-2

DIF2

DIF-A

DIF-B

DIF-C

≥1

DIFT-3

DIF3

DIFT-4 (*1)

DIFT-5 (*1)

DIF4

≥1

2F-A

2F-B

2F-C

≥1

DIF5

330

331

352

DIF

DIFT-DIF TP

DIFT-HOC TP

DIFT TRIP

HOC

5F-A

5F-B

5F-C

≥1

DIFTPMD

100

3POR

2PAND (*2)

≥1

122

123

2F-Lock

5F-Lock

≥1

DIF-A_BLOCK

DIF-B_BLOCK

DIF-C_BLOCK

1616

Note:

1617

1618

(*1) Models 203 and 204 are not provided with DIFT-4 and DIFT-5.

(*2) [Phase matching]="Beta" setting only

Figure 2.2.1.2 Scheme Logic of Current Differential Protection

⎯ 13 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Display mode following differential tripping

Following a trip output, GRT100 can display either the operating phase or the faulted phase

according to the user’s requirements as shown in Table 2.2.1.1. The operating phase or faulted

phase display is selectable by a setting in the Record menu.

Table 2.2.1.1 Operating Phase / Faulted Phase Display

Operating phase display

Faulted phase display

Setting

1 = Operating

2 = Fault

(Setting/Record/Fault

record/Phase mode)

Displayed phase

Operating phase

Faulted phase (for single-phase to earth, phase to

phase, two-phase to earth and three-phase to

earth faults)

Generally, the operating phase of the DIF element

does not correspond with the faulted phase, but

depends on the transformer configuration and the

electrical quantities that are input to the GRT100

current differential calculation.

Application

All two- and three-winding transformers

• Faults at primary side or secondary side of Yy0

and Yy6 transformers

• Faults at primary side of Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7,

Yd9, Yd11, Yy2, Yy4, Yy8 and Yy10

transformers

• Faults at secondary side of Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7,

Dy9 and Dy11 transformers

• Faults on Dd2, Dd4, Dd6, Dd8 and Dd10

transformers, faults at Zig-zag connected side

of transformers and faults at tertiary side of

three-winding transformers are not supported.

Logic

Refer to Figure 2.2.1.4.

∗ Phase (A/B/C) display is based on the operating ∗ Phase (A/B/C) display is based on the operating

signal of DIF or HOC element, and “N” display is

based on the operating signal of REF and DIFT

elements. If the REF is not used, “N” is not

displayed.

signal of DIF or HOC element and a differential

current value, and “N” display is based on the

operating signal of REF and DIFT elements. If the

REF is not used, “N” is not displayed.

⎯ 14 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

DIFT

HOC-A

[Operating phase]

Phase A

≥1

HOC-B

HOC-C

Phase B

Phase C

121

DIF

≥1

Phase N

DIF-A

DIF-B

DIF-C

Faulted phase

selection logic

1REF

≥1

2F-A

2F-B

2F-C

≥1

1REF1

1REF5

[Faulted phase]

2REF

5F-A

5F-B

5F-C

≥1

2REF1

2REF5

100

3REF

2F-Lock

5F-Lock

≥1

3REF1

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with 1REF-4,

1REF-5, 2REF-4, 2REF-5, 3REF-4 and 3REF-5.

3REF5

Figure 2.2.1.4 Operating Phase and Faulted Phase Selection Logic

⎯ 15 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.2.2 Stability for CT Saturation during Through-fault Conditions

For current differential protection of transformers, GRT100 has a strong restraint characteristic in

the large current region for erroneous differential current due to CT saturation. Further, GRT100

provides a CT saturation countermeasure function. If any CTs saturate due to a large through-fault

current, an apparent differential current is generated in the differential circuit and may cause false

operation of the differential protection.

Operation Principle

Even when a CT saturates under very large primary currents, the waveform of the saturated CT

secondary current has two identifiable periods in each cycle: a non-saturated period and a

saturated period. The GRT100 utilizes this phenomenon and provides very secure operation for

external faults with a large through-fault current.

Figure 2.2.2.1 shows a block diagram of the CT saturation countermeasure (CTS). The CTS has a

waveform discriminating element (WDE) and starting element (SE). WDE operates if the change

in the instantaneous value of the differential current is less than a specified percentage of the

change in the instantaneous value of the restraining current. In the CTs non-saturated period, the

differential current is theoretically zero for through-fault currents. The element operates in this

period.

Current

Input

Differential Element

(DIFT_DIF)

Tripping

Output

[CTSEN]

Waveform Discriminating

Element

Starting Element

CTS

Figure 2.2.2.1 Differential Element with CT Saturation Countermeasure

The algorithm of this element is given by the following equation:

ΔId < 0.15×(ΔIp + ΔIn)

where,

ΔId : Change in the differential current Id

(ΔIp + ΔIn) : Change in the restraining current in the positive and negative cycles

Id : Differential current

Ip : Sum of positive input currents

In : Sum of negative input currents

SE operates when the sum of the absolute values of the difference between the instantaneous

values of current data at each current input from one cycle is greater than 0.5 × (CT secondary

rated current).

SE discriminates between healthy and faulty power system conditions and blocks the output of

WDE which may otherwise operate during healthy conditions.

Figure 2.2.2.2 shows CT secondary current waveforms of the incoming and outgoing terminals,

⎯ 16 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

and also the differential current at the time of an external fault with outgoing terminal CT

saturation.

Incoming terminal

current

Outgoing terminal

current

Differential

current

No change period

Figure 2.2.2.2 CT Secondary Current Waveforms and Differential Current for an External

Fault with CT Saturation

From the inception of the fault until the CT secondary current at the outgoing terminal saturates,

the differential current Id is zero and the change in the differential current ΔId obtained from

equation (2) is also zero. However, the change in the restraining current given by equation (3) is a

sufficiently large positive value, so equation (1) is met and WDE operates.

SE detects changes in the terminal currents and rapidly operates, producing an AND output with

WDE. After this, since there is a period during which equation (1) is not satisfied, a certain time

delay is inserted to reliably block the operation of the DIFT_DIF differential element.

If, during an internal fault, there is a period during which the change in the instantaneous value of

the differential current is small due to CT saturation, WDE will not operate because the change in

the restraining current is also small during that period. Thus, during an internal fault, operation of

the differential element is not blocked falsely.

The CTS function can be disabled by the scheme switch [CTSEN].

⎯ 17 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.2.3 Matching of CT Secondary Currents

The currents supplied to the differential elements must be matched in phase displacement and

amplitude under through-load and through-fault conditions.

Generally, it is difficult to completely match the incoming current with the outgoing current for

the relay input because the CT ratios at the primary, secondary and tertiary sides of a transformer

are not matched in terms of the CT ratio, phase angle and cancelling of zero-sequence current.

GRT100 provides the following matching method:

Primary

Secondary

CT ratio: N1

CT ratio: N2

Transformer

Ip/N1=i1

GRT100

Is/N2=i2

Matching of phase

angle / Zero-sequence

current elimination

Matching of phase

angle / Zero-sequence

current elimination

Matching of CT ratio

Kct1×i1

Kct2×i2

Differential relay calculation

Figure 2.2.2.1 Matching Method

GRT100 supports selectable two matching methods, α-method (Alpha) and β-method (Beta). The

method is selected by the scheme switch [Phase matching].

Phase matching is performed by setting according to the hands of a clock and the transformer

connections described in IEC60076-1. For details of the setting, refer to 2.2.5.

2.2.3.1 α-method phase matching

This method corrects the phase angle by using each winding current calculated as follows:

- Current substructed zero-sequence current from each phase current in Star- winding side of

transformer

- Phase-to-phase Current in Delta-winding side of transformer

The followings show calculation formula and current vectors in an example of a transformer

Yd11.

Isa

Ipa

Is1

Isb

Ip1

Isc

Ipc

Ipb

2Ipa − Ipb − Ipc

Isa − Isc

(1)

Ip1=

Is1=

⎯ 18 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2Ipb − Ipc − Ipa

Isb − Isa

(2)

(3)

Ip2 =

Is2 =

2Ipc − Ipa − Ipb

Isc − Isb

Ip3 =

Is3 =

where,

Ipa, Ipb, Ipc: Primary side terminal current of transformer

Isa, Isb, Isc : Secondary side terminal current of transformer

Further, zero-sequence current is eliminated from the relay input current (Ip∗) for the calculation

of the differential current as follows:

2Ipa − Ipb − Ipc 3Ipa − (Ipa + Ipb + Ipc)

Ip1=

= Ipa − Ipo

= Ipb − Ipo

= Ipc − Ipo

2Ipb − Ipc − Ipa 3Ipb − (Ipa + Ipb + Ipc)

Ip2 =

2Ipc − Ipa − Ipb 3Ipa − (Ipa + Ipb + Ipc)

Ip3 =

2.2.3.2 β-method (Traditional method) phase matching

This is a traditional method that delta current (phase-to-phase current) on the Star-winding side of

a Star/Delta transformer and phase current on the Delta-winding side of that is introduced into a

relay input for the calculation of the differential current. Traditionally, the phase matching is

realized by Delta connecting the CTs on the Star-winding side and by Star connecting the CTs on

the Delta-winding side. In GRT100, however, it is realized by software.

The followings show calculation formula and current vectors in an example of a transformer

Yd11.

Ipa

Is1

Ip1

Ipb

Isc

Ipa − Ipb

(4)

(5)

(6)

Is1= Isa

Ip1=

Ipb − Ipc

Is2 = Isb

Ip2 =

Ipc − Ipa

Is3 = Isc

Ip3 =

⎯ 19 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.2.3.3 Zero-sequence current elimination

In addition to compensating for the phase angle between the primary and secondary currents of the

transforemer, also phase angle matching prevents unnecessary operation due to zero-sequence

current during an external earth fault, such as in the following cases.

Case 1:

When an external fault occurs at the star-connected side of the transformer shown in Figure

2.2.3.2, a zero-sequence current flows in star-connected side, but the zero-sequence current at the

delta-side circulates in the delta winding. The zero-sequence current is only fed into the star

winding side of the DIFT which is star-connected at the CT secondary, thus causing the DIFT to

operate incorrectly. In α-method phase matching, the zero-sequence current is eliminated from a

relay input current as described above. In β-method phase matching, the zero-sequence current is

eliminated from the relay input current by Delta connection on the Star-winding side.

Since the DIFT provides a function to eliminate the zero-sequence current by software, the DIFT

is insensitive the fault described.

I₀

Transforme

I₀

3 ₀

DIFT

Figure 2.2.3.2 External Earth Fault at the Star-connected side of a Transformer

Case 2:

When the delta winding of a power transformer is earthed through an earthing transformer as

shown in Figure 2.2.3.3 and the earthing transformer is located within the differential protection

zone, in case of an external earth fault the zero-sequence current flows only on the delta side of the

power transformer and appears as a differential current.

I₀

Earthing

Transforme

3I₀

DIF

Figure 2.2.3.3 External Earth Fault at the Delta-winding side of a Transformer with

in-zone Earthing Transformer

⎯ 20 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

In α-method phase matching, since the DIFT provides a function to eliminate the zero-sequence

current by software, the DIFT is insensitive to the fault described.

In β-method phase matching, however, since the zero-sequence current is not eliminated because

of Star connection on the Delta-winding side, the DIFT may operate unnecessary.

In case the GRT100 is applied to a transformer with in-zone earthing transformer, the [Phase

matching] = “Alpha” setting is recommended.

2.2.3.4 Matching of CT Ratio

If I₁to I₃correspond to 1CT to 3CT secondary currents, differential current I_dis calculated

according to the following equation,

I_d= kct1⋅I₁+ kct2⋅I₂+ kct3⋅I₃

where kct1 to kct3 are settings corresponding to 1CT to 3CT.

Setting kct1 is obtained by using the following equation.

kct1 = I_n/I_base1

= I_n/( 3 × I_base1) if 1CT is delta-connected.

where

I_n= rated secondary current of 1CT (1A or 5A)

_base1= secondary current of 1CT based on the kVA rating of the power transformer.

= transformer capacity(kVA)/( 3 × rated voltage(kV)) × CT ratio of 1CT

If the 1CT secondary circuit is delta-connected, 3 × I_base1is used instead of I_base1in the equation

above.

Settings kct2 and kct3 are obtained in the same way.

The differential current I_dis zero under through-load and through-fault conditions.

kct1 × I₁to kct3 × I₃are equal to the rated secondary current of each CT when the rated line

currents based on the kVA rating of the power transformer flow.

⎯ 21 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.2.4 Connection between CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100

GRT100 is provided with 2 or 3 three-phase current input terminals depending on the relay model.

To validate the phase angle matching described previously and apply in-phase current from each

winding to the relay, connect the CT secondary circuits to the current input terminals of the relay

as follows;

As shown below, the phases used in the phase angle setting (indicated by an arrowhead) must be

connected to the AC input terminals with the lowest number in the terminal group such as 1, 9, 17,

then the other two phases should be connected to the terminals with a larger number clockwise

from the setting phase, such as 3 and 5, 11 and 13, or 19 and 21.

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

21 19 17

13 11

GRT100

22 20 18

14 12 10

Figure 2.2.4.1 Connection of CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100

Terminal numbers and corresponding input currents are shown in the following table.

Model

Terminal block Terminal number

Input current

100 series / 200 series TB1

1-2

3-4

Current of primary winding

5-6

9-10

11-12

13-14

17-18

19-20

21-22

Current of secondary winding

Current of tertiary winding

⎯ 22 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.2.5 Setting

The following shows the setting elements necessary for the current differential protection and their

setting ranges. Setting can be performed on the LCD screen or PC screen.

Element

DIFT

Range

Step

Default Remarks

0.10 − 1.00 ⁽^∗⁾

DIF

0.01

0.30

Minimum operating current

100%

200%

1.00

% slope of small current region

% slope of large current region

Break point of dual characteristics

Second harmonic detection

Fifth harmonic detection

10 − 100%

10 − 200%

0.01

1.00 − 20.00(*)

10 − 50%

k2f

k5f

15%

30%

2.00

10 − 100%

HOC

0.01

High-set overcurrent protection

2.00 − 20.00(*)

CT matching

kct1

kct2

kct3

0.01

1.00

Primary winding

0.05 − 50.00

CT ratio

Secondary winding

Tertiary winding

Phase angle matching

(α-method)

If [Phase matching]=Alpha setting

Primary winding

yd_p

yd_s

yd_t

1(star) / 2(delta)

Secondary winding

Tertiary winding

vec_s 0 – 11

Phase angle difference between primary

and secondary

vec_t 0 – 11

Phase angle difference between primary

and tertiary

If [Phase matching]=Beta setting

Primary winding

0 − 11

Secondary winding

Tertiary winding

(β-method)

Scheme switch

[Phase matching]

Alpha / Beta

Beta

Matching methods of CT secondary

currents

[DIFTPMD]

[2F – LOCK]

[5F - LOCK]

[DIF1] to [DIF5]

[CTSEN]

3POR / 1P

3POR / 2PAND / 1P

Off / On

3POR

Trip mode (if [Phase matching] = Alpha)

Trip mode (if [Phase matching] = Beta)

Block by second harmonic

Block by fifth harmonic

Off / On

(**)

Output tripping signal

Off / On

Off

CT saturation function

(∗): Multiplier of CT secondary rated current including CT ratio correction.

(**): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.

⎯ 23 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting of ik

ik determines the minimum operation sensitivity of the DIF element. ik is set as a ratio to the CT

secondary rated current.

The minimum sensitivity setting ik is determined from the maximum erroneous differential

current under normal operating conditions.

Setting of p1, p2 and kp

Percentage restraining factor (% slope)

= (Differential current) / (Through current)

= (Differential current) / [{(Incoming current) + (Outgoing current)} /2]

p1 is the percentage restraining factor which defines the DIF restraining characteristic in the small

current region. The setting is determined by the sum of:

•

CT accuracy error (generally considered as 5%)

Tap error: Error between maximum/minimum tap and the middle tap when taking the middle

tap of the tap changer as a reference.

•

Matching error: The error due to CT mismatch may be small enough to be neglected in the

setting.

Relay calculation error, and others (5%)

The recommended setting is “Sum of above” × 1.5 (margin).

p2 is the percentage restraining factor which defines the restraining characteristic in the large

current region. The setting is determined from the maximum erroneous differential current which

is generated when a large through fault current flows.

kp is the break point of the dual percentage restraining characteristics. It is set above the maximum

operating current level of the transformer between the maximum forced-cooled rated current and

the maximum emergency overload current level, as a ratio to the CT secondary rated current.

Setting of k2f

k2f is set to detect the second harmonic content in the inrush current during transformer

energization and blocks GRT100 to prevent incorrect operation due to the inrush current. A

setting of 15% is suggested if there is no data on the minimum second harmonic content.

Setting of k5f

k5f is set to detect the fifth harmonic content during transformer over-excitation and blocks

GRT100 to prevent incorrect operation due to transient over-excitation conditions.

A setting of 30% is suggested if there is no data on the minimum fifth harmonic content.

Setting of kh

Kh is the HOC setting and should be set above the estimated maximum inrush current.

The recommended setting is more than “Maximum peak value of Inrush current” × kct.

Setting for CT ratio matching

Taking the transformer shown in Figure 2.2.5.1 as an example, the CT ratio matching settings kct1

to kct3 can be calculated as follows. For transformer capacity, take the maximum of the rated

capacites of the three windings.

⎯ 24 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Calculation steps

Primary

Secondary

40 × 10³

Tertiary

(1) Transformer capacity (kVA)

(2) Voltage(kV)

154

150

(3) Rated line current(A)

350

2100

=(1)/( 3 × (2))

(4) CT ratio

120

240

8.75

(5) Secondary rated line current(A) =(3)/(4) 2.50

2.92

(6) CT secondary rating(A)

(7) Setting =(6)/(5)

Kct1=2.00

Kct2=1.71

Kct3=0.57

Note: kct1 to kct3 should be set to 2.00 or less. If more, the CT ratio matching of relay input current

may be not stable.

Primary

40MVA

154kV

Secondary

40MVA

66kV

CT1

300/5

CT2

600/5

CT3

1200/5

Tertiary

12MVA

11kV

kct1

kct3

kct2

GRT100

Figure 2.2.5.1 CT Ratio Matching

As explained in Section 2.2.3 for Mathcing of CT Secondary Currents, examples of setting for

both α-method and β-method are described as follows:

⎯ 25 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting for phase angle matching

The phase angle difference between line currents on either side of the power transformer are

corrected by setting according to the hands of a clock and the transformer connections described in

IEC60076-1 as follows:

(When α-method is selected for [Phase matching])

If a winding is star-connected, set 1 (=star) for winding setting yd_p, yd_s, and yd_t. If

delta-connected, set 2 (=delta). Next, set the phase angle difference vec_s and vec_t from the

primary winding as a lagging angle winding expressed in hours. One hour corresponds to lagging

by thirty degrees.

Note: In the case of a zigzag connected winding, set 2 (=delta).

Example:

Setting for star/star/delta transformer.

IEC60076-1

Setting

yd_p

yd_s vec_s yd_t vec_t

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

Y y 0 d 11

yd_p:

yd_s:

vec_s:

yd_t:

Because the primary winding is star-connected, set 1.

Because the secondary winding is star-connected, set 1.

Because the secondary winding is in phase with the primary winding, set 0.

Because the tertiary winding is delta-connected, set 2.

vec_t:

Because the tertiary winding lags the primary winding by 330°, set 11.

The settings for the transformer connections described in IEC60076-1 are listed in Table 2.2.5.2.

Note: The following calculation is performed in the relay for phase angle correction.

Table 2.2.5.1 Phase Angle Matching Calculation

O’clock

Calculation

Remarks

Ia’ = (2Ia − Ib − Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ib − Ic − Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ic − Ia − Ib)/ 3

Setting value

Ia’ = (Ia – Ib)/

Ia’ = (Ia − 2Ib + Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ia + Ib − 2Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ib + Ic −2Ia)/ 3

Ia’ = (Ic − Ib)/ Ib’ = (Ia – Ic)/ Ic’ = (Ib − Ia)/

Ia’ = (2Ic − Ia − Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ia − Ib − Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ib − Ia − Ic)/ 3

Ia’ = (Ic – Ia)/ Ib’ = (Ia – Ib)/ Ic’ = (Ib – Ic)/

Ia’ = (Ib + Ic −2Ia)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ia − 2Ib + Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia + Ib − 2Ic)/ 3

Ia’ = (Ib − Ia)/ Ib’ = (Ic − Ib)/ Ic’ = (Ia – Ic)/

Ia’ = (2Ib − Ia − Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ic − Ia − Ib)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ia − Ib − Ic)/ 3

Ia’ = (Ib – Ic)/ Ib’ = (Ic – Ia)/ Ic’ = (Ia – Ib)/

Ia’ = (Ia + Ib − 2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib + Ic −2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia − 2Ib + Ic)/ 3

Ia’ = (Ia – Ic)/ Ib’ = (Ib − Ia)/ Ic’ = (Ic − Ib)/

Ib’ = (Ib − Ic)/

Ic’ = (Ic – Ia)/

⎯ 26 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Table 2.2.5.2 Setting for Phase Angle Matching (for α-method)

(a) Settings for typical connections of 2-windings transformer

Transformer connections

described in IEC60076-1

Primary, Secondary

Settings for phase angle correction

Remarks

Primary, Secondary, Phase angle Diff.

Phase angle matching

calculation (Table 2.2.5.1)

(yd_p)

(yd_s)

(vec_s)

(P)

(S)

Yy0

Dd0

Yd1

P: 0 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

P: 1 O’clock

S: 1 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 1 O’clock

Dy1

Dd2

Dd4

Yd5

P: 11 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

P: 1 O’clock

S: 3 O’clock

P: 1 O’clock

S: 5 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 5 O’clock

Dy5

Yy6

Dd6

Yd7

P: 7 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 6 O’clock

P: 1 O’clock

S: 7 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 7 O’clock

Dy7

P: 5 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

Dd8

P: 1 O’clock

S: 9 O’clock

Dd10

Yd11

P: 1 O’clock

S: 11 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 11 O’clock

Dy11

Dz10

P: 1 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

P: 1 O’clock

S: 11 O’clock

Note: A 2-windings transformer covers a 3-windings transformer with a stabilizing-winding circuit

for which 2-windings transformer protection relay can be applied.

⎯ 27 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

(b) Settings for typical connections of 3-windings transformer

Transformer connections described in

IEC60076-1

Settings for phase angle correction

Remarks

Primary, Secondary, PA Diff., Tertiary, PA Diff.

Phase angle matching

calculation (Table

2.2.5.1)

Primary , Secondary,

Tertiary

(yd_p)

(yd_s)

(vec_s) (yd_t) (vec_t)

(P)

(S)

(T)

P: 0 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

T: 1 O’clock

Yy0d1

P: 0 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

T: 11 O’clock

Yy0d11

Yd1d1

P: 0 O’clock

S: 1 O’clock

T: 1 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 11 O’clock

T: 11 O’clock

Yd11d11

P: 1 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

T: 1 O’clock

Dy11d0

Dy1d0

Dd0d0

Yy0y0

P: 11 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

T: 11 O’clock

P: 1 O’clock

S: 1 O’clock

T: 1 O’clock

P: 0 O’clock

S: 0 O’clock

T: 0 O’clock

Note: Dotted line: Reference phase

Reference phase for phase angle matching

The phase of a star-connected winding side is used as the reference phase for phase angle

matching.

Yd: primary

Dy: secondary

Yy: primary

Dd: the reference vector leads the A phase of the primary side by 30°.

Phase rotation

The relationship between each terminal current vector of a transformer, which depends on the

transformer connection and the connection between the transformer and the power system, must

be checked. The phase displacement of a delta-connected side may not be determined only by the

transformer connection described in IEC60076. Table 2.2.5.3 shows an example illustrating the

connection of a transformer and power system and their current vectors when a Yd1 type

transformer is connected to the power system with both clockwise and anticlockwise phase

rotation. In this case, the setting for phase angle correction is not corresponding to that of Table

2.2.5.1.

⎯ 28 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Table 2.2.5.3 Transformer Connection and Current Vector

Delta-side connected with 30° lagging

Delta-side connected with 30° leading

Transformer

Yd1

Transformer

Connection between

Yd1 Transformer

and Power system

Primary

Secondary

Primary

Secondary

Yd1

Transformer

I_2a

Transformer

Each winding

connection and

Incoming/Outgoing

current

I_1c

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

I_2c

I_2b

I_2a

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

I_2a’=I_2a−I_2b

I_2a’=I_2a−I_2c

I_1b

I_2b

I_2b’=I_2b

−

I_2b’=I_2b−I_2a

I_1a

I_2c

−

I_2c’=I_2cI

I_2c’=I_2c−I_2b

I_2b’=I_2b−I_2a

_2c’=I_2c−I_2a

I_1a

Incoming current

vector and Outgoing

current vector

I_2b

I_2b’=I_2b−I_2c

I_2c

I_2b

I_2c

I_2c’=I_2c−I_2b

I_1c

I_1b

I_1c

I_1b

I_2a

I_2a’=I_2a−I_2b

I_2a’=I_2a−I_2c

Outgoing

Current

Incoming

Current

Incoming

Current

Outgoing

Current

Setting

Yd_p=1, yd_s=2, vec_s=1 (Same as Yd1)

Yd_p=1, yd_s=2, vec_s=11 (same as Yd11)

Auto-transformer (with internal delta-winding)

Set Yy0.

Zigzag connected transformer

Set yd_p, yd_s and vec_s to 2 (=delta) for zigzag connected side. Zero-sequence current is

canceled.

When three-winding model (model 200 series) applied to two-winding transformer:

Keep the settings of “yd_t” and “vec_t” to the default setting values.

One-and-a-half breaker system

When applied to one-and-a-half breaker system, note the DIFT and REF setting as shown in Table

2.2.5.4.

Table 2.2.5.4 Example of DIFT and REF Setting

Setting

DIFT

1REF

1I0

2REF

Yd11

yd_p=1

yd_s=2

vec_s=11

One-and-a-half breaker system

Yd11

Yy0d11

yd_p=1

yd_s=1

vec_s=0

yd_t=2

2Io

1I0

vec_s=11

Yy0d11

yd_p=1

yd_s=1

1I0

vec_s=0

yd_t=2

vec_s=11

⎯ 29 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

(When β-method is selected for [Phase matching])

The phase angle differences between line currents on each side of the power transformer are

corrected by setting according to the hands of a clock as follows:

Rule 1:

If all the windings are star-connected, then take one of the windings as a reference winding and set

1 (= one o’clock) for it. For other winding(s), set the phase angle difference from the reference

winding by the expression of the leading angle. One hour corresponds to leading by thirty degrees.

Example 1

Example 2

If the setting winding leads the reference winding by 60°, set 3 (= three o’clock).

If the setting winding is in phase with the reference winding, set 1 (= one

o’clock).

Example 3

If the setting winding lags the reference winding by 60° (that is leading by 300°),

set 11 (= eleven o’clock).

Rule 2:

If any of the windings are delta-connected, take one of the delta-connected winding(s) as a

reference winding and set 0 (= noon) for it. For other star- or delta-connected winding(s), set

according to the Rule 1 mentioned above.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

If the setting winding leads the reference winding by 60°, set 2 (= two o’clock).

If the setting winding is in phase with the reference winding, set 0 (= noon).

If the setting winding lags the reference winding by 60° (that is leading by 300°),

set 10 (ten o’clock).

The settings for the two-winding transformer connections described in IEC60076-1 are listed in

Table 2.2.5.5.

Three-winding transformers are also set according to the above mentioned rules.

Example 4

Setting for star/star/delta transformer.

Setting (d1 / d2 / d3)

Primary (d1)

Secondary (d2)

Primary

Secondary

Tertiary

Tertiary (d3)

⎯ 30 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Note: The following calculation is performed in the relay for phase angle correction.

Setting

Calculation

Ia = Ia

Remarks

Setting value

Ia = (Ia – Ic)/

Ia = −Ic

Ia = (−Ic + Ib)/

Ia = Ib

Ia = (Ib – Ia)/

Ia = −Ia

Ia = (−Ia + Ic)/

Ia = Ic

Ia = (Ic – Ib)/

Ia = −Ib

Ia = (Ia – Ib)/

⎯ 31 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Table 2.2.5.5 Setting for Phase Angle Matching (for β-method)

(a) Settings for typical connections of 2-windings transformer

Transformer connections

described in IEC60076-1

Settings for phase angle correction

Primary , Secondary

Remarks

(d1)

(d2)

Yy0

Dd0

Yd1

Dy1

Dd2

Dd4

Yd5

Based on primary winding.

Based on secondary winding.

Based on primary winding.

Based on secondary winding.

Dy5

Yy6

Dd6

Yd7

Based on primary winding.

Based on secondary winding.

Dy7

Dd8

Based on primary winding.

Based on secondary winding.

Based on primary winding.

Based on secondary winding.

Dd10

Yd11

or 10

Dy11

Note: A 2-windings transformer covers a 3-windings transformer with a stabilizing-winding circuit

for which 2-windings transformer protection relay can be applied.

⎯ 32 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

(b) Settings for typical connections of 3-windings transformer

Transformer connections described in

IEC60076-1

Settings for phase angle correction

Primary, Secondary, Tertiary

Remarks

(d1)

(d2)

(d3)

Yy0d1

Yy0d11

Yd1d1

Yd11d11

Dy11d0

Dy1d0

Dd0d0

Yy0y0

Note :

1. If all the windings are star-connected, then take one of the windings as a reference winding

and set 1 (= one hour) for it.

2. If any of the windings are delta-connected, take one of the delta-connected winding(s) as a

reference winding and set 0 for it.

⎯ 33 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

Restricted earth fault protection (REF) is a zero-phase current differential scheme applied to a

star-connected winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through a low impedance. It gives

highly sensitive protection for internal earth faults.

REF employs a low impedance current differential scheme which detects the differential current

between the zero-sequence current I₀derived from the three-phase line currents and the neutral

current I_Nin the neutral conductor as shown in Figure 2.3.1.

Ia+Ib+Ic

REF

I_N

Figure 2.3.1 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

REF and the overall differential protection DIFT use the three-phase line currents in common.

GRT100 has two or three REF elements depending on the model, providing separate protection

for all star-connected and neutral-earthed windings.

The elements have the same percentage restraining characteristics and are stable for all faults

outside the protected zone.

Figure 2.3.2 shows the block diagram of the REF element which is composed of REF_DIF and

REF_DEF. The REF_DIF has a percentage restraining characteristic while the REF_DEF

provides a directional check feature to discriminate between internal and external faults. When the

REF_DEF is “ON”, the REF_DEF element is used. The REF_DEF element provides additional

security against incorrect operation of the REF element in the event of saturation of the neutral

CT. The REF_DEF is blocked when the maximum phase current exceeds 2 × kct × (Rated current

of neutral CT), since the REF element is used for earth fault protection of transformer winding.

For details, see Section 2.10.3. In case of terminal current larger than that, the DIFT element

provides tripping. The REF_DEF can be disabled by setting the scheme switch [REF_DEF] to

“OFF”.

REF_DIF

REF

REF_DEF

internal fault detection

≥1

Ires≦2.0×Max_kct

[REF_DEF]

OFF

Figure 2.3.2

Block Diagram of REF

Figure 2.3.3 shows the scheme logic of the restricted earth fault protection when three REF

elements are applied. Each REF element can perform instantaneous or time-delayed tripping of up

to five breakers. Any of the five breaker tripping signals 1REF-1 to 3REF-5 are enabled or

disabled by the scheme switch [1REF1] to [3REF5] settings.

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with 1REF-4, 1REF5, 2REF-4, 2REF-5, 3REF-4 and

⎯ 34 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3REF-5.

T1REF

1REF

1REF-1

1REF-2

1REF-3

1REF-4

[1REF1]

“ON”

0.00 - 10.00s

[1REF2]

“ON”

[1REF3]

“ON”

[1REF4]

“ON”

1REF-5

332

[1REF5]

“ON”

1REF TRIP

≥1

2REF-1

2REF-2

2REF-3

2REF-4

2REF-5

2REF

Same as above

333

2REF TRIP

≥1

3REF-1

3REF-2

3REF-3

3REF-4

3REF-5

3REF

Same as above

334

3REF TRIP

≥1

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with 1REF-4, 1REF-5, 2REF-4, 2REF-5, 3REF-4 and

3REF-5.

Figure 2.3.3 Scheme Logic of Restricted Earth Fault Protection

Appendix L shows applications of the three REF elements to various types of transformers. When

protecting a two- or three-winding transformer, 1REF, 2REF and 3REF elements should be

applied to the primary (or high-voltage) winding, secondary (or medium-voltage) winding and

tertiary (or low-voltage) winding respectively. This is also valid for auto-transformer protection

but the application must comply with Appendix L.

In the application to auto-transformers, one REF element may introduce two or three line currents

and one neutral current as shown in Appendix L. 1REF to 3REF elements recognize the number of

the line currents according to the scheme switch setting of [1REF] to [3REF].

⎯ 35 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting

The following shows the setting elements for the restricted earth fault protection and their setting

ranges.

Element

Range

Step

0.01

Default

0.50

Remarks

1REF

1ik

Minimum operating current

0.05 − 0.50(*)

1.00 − 50.00

50 − 100%

0.50 − 2.00(*)

1kct1

1kct2

1kct3

1p2

1.00

CT ratio matching

1.00

100%

1.00

% slope of DF2

1kp

0.01

DF2 restraining current section of

large current characteristic

2REF

2ik

0.01

0.50

1.00

100%

1.00

Minimum operating current

0.05 − 0.50(*)

1.00 − 50.00

50 − 100%

2kct1

2kct2

2kct3

2p2

CT ratio matching

% slope of DF2

2kp

0.01

DF2 restraining current section of

large current characteristic

0.50 − 2.00(*)

3REF

3ik

0.01

0.50

1.00

100%

1.00

Minimum operating current

0.05 − 0.50(*)

1.00 − 50.00

50 − 100%

3kct1

3kct2

3kct3

3p2

CT ratio matching

% slope of DF2

3kp

0.01

DF2 restraining current section of

large current characteristic

0.50 − 2.00(*)

T1REF

T2REF

T3REF

0.01s

0.00s

0.00 − 10.00s

Delayed tripping

Scheme switch

[1REF1] to [1REF5]

[2REF1] to [2REF5]

[3REF1] to [3REF5]

[1REF] to [3REF]

[REF_DEF]

Off/On

(**)

1Io

Off

Enable or disable to output

tripping signal

Off/On

Number of line currents input to

1REF, 2REF and 3REF elements

1Io/2Io/3Io

Off/On

(*):

Multiplier of secondary rated current

(**): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.

Setting of ik (1ik, 2ik and 3ik)

1ik, 2ik and 3ik are minimum operating current settings and are set as a ratio to the line CT

secondary rated current. ik is determined from the maximum erroneous zero sequence differential

current under normal operating conditions. A typical setting would be between 10% and 50%.

⎯ 36 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting of kct (1kct1-1kct3, 2kct1-2kct3 and 3kct1-3kct3)

CT ratio matching is performed between the line CT(s) and the neutral CT by setting 1kct1-1kct3

for 1REF element, 2kct1-2kct3 for 2REF element and 3kct1-3kct3 for 3REF element. The settings

are obtained as a ratio of the line CTs ratio to the neutral CT ratio and the line CTs have the

notations shown in Appendix L according to 1REF to 3REF applications.

For example, the settings of 1kct1, 1kct2, 2kct1 and 2kct2 are calculated;

1kct1 = (CT ratio of line CT 1ct-1)/(CT ratio of neutral CT 1nCT)

1kct2 = (CT ratio of line CT 1ct-2)/(CT ratio of neutral CT 1nCT)

2kct1 = (CT ratio of line CT 2ct-1)/(CT ratio of neutral CT 2nCT)

2kct2 = (CT ratio of line CT 2ct-2)/(CT ratio of neutral CT 2nCT)

where,

CT ratio = (primary rated current)/(secondary rated current).

Setting of scheme switch [1REF] to [3REF]

[1REF] to [3REF] are set to "1I0", "2I0" or "3I0" when they introduce one, two or three line

currents respectively.

Setting of scheme switch [REF_DEF]

The function of REF_DEF is set to “On/Off” by setting.

⎯ 37 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.4 Overcurrent Protection

GRT100 provides definite time and inverse time overcurrent elements for both phase faults and

earth faults, separately for each transformer winding. Three phase currents from each set of line

CTs are used for the phase fault protection elements, while the earth fault protection is based on

the neutral CT input.These elements can be used selectively depending on the requirements of the

particular application, but the following points should be noted:

• In the case of large power transformers, overcurrent protection is usually employed only as

back-up protection for terminal faults, and for uncleared LV system faults. In such cases, the

overcurrent elements can be applied either on one or both sides of the transformer as

required.

• Coverage of internal transformer faults is generally limited.

• It is common practice to apply IDMTL phase and earth fault overcurrent protection as

back-up for the LV system. Current and time settings must be arranged to grade with

downstream relays and fuses. The phase fault current setting must also be set to exceed the

maximum overload current.

• High-set instantaneous overcurrent protection can be applied on the primary side to provide

back-up protection for terminal faults. The current setting must be higher than the maximum

through-fault current to ensure that the element does not operate for faults on the LV side.

One of the following IEC-standard-compliant inverse time characteristics or one long time inverse

characteristic is available for the inverse current protection.

• standard inverse

• very inverse

IEC 60255-3

• extremely inverse

Up to three definite time elements (1OC to 3OC) and inverse time elements (1OCI to 3OCI) input

three phase currents from line CTs in the transformer windings.

Up to three definite time elements (1EF to 3EF) and inverse time elements (1EFI to 3EFI) input

neutral currents from CTs in the neutral circuit.

Figure 2.4.1 and Figure 2.4.2 show the scheme logic of overcurrent protection. Each element can

perform time-delayed tripping of up to five breakers. The breaker tripping signals are blocked by

the scheme switch settings.

The number of overcurrent elements applied depends on the relay models.

⎯ 38 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

T1OC

370

≥1

1OC-1

1OC

[1OC1]

[1OC2]

[1OC3]

[1OC4]

[1OC5]

0.00 - 10.00s

1OC-2

1OC-3

1OC-4

1OC-5

335

1OC TRIP

≥1

225

≥1

1OCI-1

1OCI-2

1OCI-3

1OCI-4

1OCI

[1OCI1]

[1OCI2]

[1OCI3]

[1OCI4]

[1OCI5]

1OCI-5

339

1OIC TRIP

≥1

Note: 2OC and 3OC provide the same logic as 1OC. 2OCI and 3OCI provide the same logic as 1OCI.

Models 203 and 204 are not provided with 1OC-4, 1OC-5, 2OC-4, 2OC-5, 3OC-4, 3OC-5,

1OCI-4, 1OCI-5, 2OCI-4, 2OCI-5, 3OCI-4 and 3OCI-5.

Figure 2.4.1 Scheme Logic of the Overcurrent Protection

⎯ 39 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

T1EF

1EF

1EF-1

[1EF1]

[1EF2]

[1EF3]

[1EF4]

[1EF5]

0.00 - 10.00s

1EF-2

1EF-3

1EF-4

1EF-5

343

1EF TRIP

≥1

1EFI

1EFI-1

1EFI-2

1EFI-3

1EFI-4

[1EFI1]

[1EFI2]

[1EFI3]

[1EFI4]

[1EFI5]

1EFI-5

346

1EFI TRIP

≥1

Note: 2EF and 3EF provide the same logic as 1EF. 2EFI and 3EFI provide the same logic as 1EFI.

Models 203 and 204 are not provided with 1EF-4, 1EF-5, 2EF-4, 2EF-5, 3EF-4, 3EF-5, 1EFI-4,

1EFI-5, 2EFI-4, 2EFI-5, 3EFI-4 and 3EFI-5.

Figure 2.4.2 Scheme Logic of the Overcurrent Protection for Earth Faults

⎯ 40 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting

The following shows the setting elements for the overcurrent protection and their setting ranges.

Element

1OC

Range

Step

0.01

0.01s

0.01

0.01s

0.01

Default Remarks

Definite time overcurrent (line)

2.00

1.00s

1.00

2.00

1.00s

1.00

0.10 − 20.0(*)

0.00 − 10.00s

0.10 − 5.00(*)

0.05 − 1.00

2OC

Definite time overcurrent (line)

Delayed tripping for 1OC

Delayed tripping for 2OC

Delayed tripping for 3OC

Inverse time overcurrent (line)

Time multiplier setting for 1OCI

Time multiplier setting for 2OCI

Time multiplier setting for 3OCI

Definite time overcurrent (neutral)

Delayed tripping for 1EF

3OC

T1OC

T2OC

T3OC

1OCI

2OCI

3OCI

T1OCI

T2OCI

0.05 − 1.00

T3OCI

0.05 − 1.00

1EF

0.10 − 20.00(*)

0.00 − 10.00s

0.10 − 5.00(*)

0.05 − 1.00

2EF

3EF

T1EF

T2EF

Delayed tripping for 2EF

T3EF

Delayed tripping for 3EF

1EFI

Inverse time overcurrent (neutral)

Time multiplier setting for 1EFI

Time multiplier setting for 2EFI

Time multiplier setting for 3EFI

Inverse time characteristic selection of

OCI elements

2EFI

3EFI

T1EFI

T2EFI

0.05 − 1.00

T3EFI

0.05 − 1.00

Scheme switch

M1OCI to M3OCI

M1EFI to M3EFI

Scheme switch

[1OC1] to [3OC5]

[1OCI1] to [3OCI5]

[1EF1] to [3EF5]

[1EFI1] to [3EFI5]

Long-Std-Very-Ext

Off/On

Std

(**)

EFI elements

Enable or disable tripping by

OC elements

OCI elements

EF elements

EFI elements

(*) : Multiplier of CT secondary rated current.

(**) : Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.

The overcurrent elements use the same three-phase line currents and neutral current as the

⎯ 41 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

differential protection and the restricted earth fault protection. When choosing settings, the

following relationships between the overcurrent elements and the connected windings must be

taken into account.

1OC, 1OCI :

2OC, 2OCI :

3OC, 3OCI :

1EF, 1EFI :

2EF, 2EFI :

3EF, 3EFI :

Primary (high-voltage) winding

Secondary (medium-voltage) winding

Tertiary (low-voltage) winding

1REF applied neutral circuit

2REF applied neutral circuit

3REF applied neutral circuit

⎯ 42 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.5 Thermal Overload Protection

The thermal overload protection is applied to protect transformers from electrical thermal damage.

A-phase current is used to detect the thermal overload of a transformer. The characteristics are

exponential functions according to the IEC 60255-8 standard and take into account the I²R losses

due to the particular operational current and the simultaneous cooling due to the coolant. In this

way the tripping time during an overload condition takes the pre-load into consideration. An alarm

stage can be set to operate before reaching the tripping condition.

Figure 2.5.1 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overcurrent protection. THR tripping output

can be given to up to five breakers. Any of the five breaker tripping signals THR-1 to THR-5 can

be blocked by the scheme switch [THR1] to [THR5] settings. Alarming signal THR-A can be

blocked by the scheme switch [THRA] setting.

THR-1

THR-2

THR-3

[THR1]

THR

“ON”

[THR2]

“ON”

[THR3]

“ON”

THR-4

THR-5

[THR4]

“ON”

[THR5]

351

THR TRIP

“ON”

≥1

248

THR-A

[THRA]

“ON”

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with THR-4 and THR-5.

Figure 2.5.1 Scheme Logic of Thermal Overload Protection

Setting

The following shows the setting elements for the thermal overload protection and their setting

ranges.

Element

Range

Step

0.1min

0.01

Default

60.0min

1.30

Remarks

Thermal time constant

Constant

0.5 − 500.0min

0.10 − 4.00

0.50 − 2.50(*1)

0.00 − 1.00(*1)

0 − 10min

0.01

1.00

Basic current

0.01

0.00

Pre-specified load current

Time for alarm (before trip) (*3)

1min

10min

Scheme switch

THR1 to THR5

THRA

Enable or disable

Off/On

(*2)

Trip

Alarm

(∗1): Multiplier of CT secondary rated current

(*2): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.

(*3): Alarming time = THR trip time (operating time) – T (setting time)

Note: Ip sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal element, and is

typically used when testing the element. For the majority of applications, Ip should be set to

zero, in which case the previous load current, Ip, is calculated internally by the thermal

model, providing memory of conditions occurring before an overload.

⎯ 43 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.6 Frequency Protection

GRT100 provides underfrequency or overfrequency protection and/or alarms for load shedding or

for detecting such an overfrequency condition caused by disconnecting load from a particular

generation location.

The frequency element FRQ comprises two frequency elements 81-1 and 81-2, the former is used

for tripping and the latter for alarms.

Figure 2.6.1 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection. The tripping element 81-1

outputs underfrequency and overfrequency trip signals L1 and H1. Either underfrequency or

overfrequency protection is selected by setting the scheme switch [FRQ-UF1] to “ON” or “OFF”.

The alarm element 81-2 outputs underfrequency and overfrequency alarm signals L2 and H2.

Either underfrequency or overfrequency alarms are selected by setting the scheme switch

[FRQ-UF2] to “ON” or “OFF”.

Frequency protection can perform time-delayed tripping of up to five breakers. Any of the breaker

tripping signals FRQ-1 to FRQ-5 can be blocked by the scheme switch [FRQ1] to [FRQ5]

settings.

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with FRQ-4 and FRQ-5.

Alarm signal FRQ-A can be blocked by the scheme switch [FRQA] setting.

Frequency protection is blocked under the condition that the system voltage is lower than the

setting of the undervoltage element UV.

TFRQL

FRQ-1

FRQ-2

FRQ-3

FRQ-4

FRQ-5

≥1

[FRQ1]

[FRQ2]

[FRQ3]

[FRQ4]

[FRQ5]

0.00 - 60.00s

TFRQH

81-1

81-2

0.00 - 60.00s

119

[FRQ-UF1]

353

FRQ-UF TRIP

354

249

OFF

[FRQ-UF2]

FRQ-OF TRIP

FRQ TRIP

≥1

[FRQ-UF2]

355

FRQ-UF ALARM

356

257

OFF

FRQ-OF ALARM

FRQ A

TFRQA

≥1

[FRQA]

0.00 - 60.00s

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with FRQ-4 and FRQ-5.

Figure 2.6.1 Scheme Logic of Frequency Protection

⎯ 44 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting

The following shows the setting elements for the frequency protection and their setting ranges.

Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

81-1 (L1, H1)

0.01Hz

49.00Hz

59.00Hz) (*)

Trip

45.00 − 55.00Hz

(54.00 − 66.00Hz

81-2 (L2, H2)

0.01Hz

48.00Hz

58.00Hz)

Alarms

45.00 − 55.00Hz

(54.00 − 66.00Hz

40V

Undervoltage block

40 − 100V

TFRQL

0.01s

10.00s

Underfrequency trip time

delay

0.00 − 60.00s

TFRQH

0.01s

10.00s

Overfrequency trip time

delay

0.00 − 60.00s

TFRQA

Alarm time delay

Enable or disable

Trip

0.00 − 60.00s

Scheme switch

[FRQ-UF1]

[FRQ-UF2]

[FRQ1] to [FRQ5]

[FRQA]

Off/On

(**)

Alarm

Trip

Alarm

(*) : Frequency values shown in parentheses are for the case of 60Hz rating. Other frequency values

are shown for the case of 50Hz rating.

(**): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.

⎯ 45 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.7 Overexcitation Protection

Overexcitation protection is applied to protect transformers from overvoltage and overfluxing

conditions.

Any single phase-to-phase connected voltage is used to detect overexcitation. Trip and alarm

characteristics, which are based on a measurement of the voltage/frequency ratio, are provided.

Figure 2.7.1 shows the scheme logic of overexcitation protection. Overexcitation element V/F

responds to voltage/frequency and outputs three signals. Signal T has an inverse time

characteristic. Signals H and A have high-set and low-set definite time characteristics

respectively. Signal T and signal H with a delayed pick-up timer TVFH are used for tripping.

Signal A is used for alarm with a delayed pick-up timer TVFA.

The V/F element has a reset feature with definite time reset. The reset time RT is set to match the

cooling characteristic that is the time for the protected transformer to reach a normal temperature

after releasing the overexitation condition.

V/F-T

V/F-1

≥1

TVFH

[V/F1]

[V/F2]

[V/F3]

[V/F4]

[V/F5]

TV/F-H

V/F

V/F-2

V/F-3

V/F-4

1 - 600s

362

V/F-T

V/F-L TRIP

V/F-H TRIP

V/F TP

V/F-5

363

350

TV/F-H

≥1

TVFA

242

V/F-A

[V/FA]

1 - 600s

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with V/F-4 and V/F-5.

Figure 2.7.1 Scheme Logic of Overexcitation Protection

Overexcitation protection can trip up to five breakers. Any of the breaker tripping signals V/F-1 to

V/F-5 can be blocked by the scheme switch [V/F1] to [V/F5] settings.

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with V/F-4 and V/F-5.

Alarm signal V/F-A can be blocked by the scheme switch [V/FA] setting.

⎯ 46 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting

The following shows the setting elements for the overexcitation protection and their setting

ranges.

Element

Range

Step

0.1V

0.01

Default Remarks

100.0V

1.03

Transformer rated voltage / VT ratio

100.0 − 120.0V

1.03 − 1.30⁽^∗⁾

1.05 − 1.30

1.10 − 1.40

1 − 600s

Alarm

1.05

Low level

High level

1.40

600s

Operation time at low level

(Inverse time curve)

Operation time at high level

(Inverse time curve)

1 − 600s

60 − 3600s

1 − 600s

250s

10s

Reset time after removing

overexcitation condition

TVFH

Operating time at high level setting

(Definite time delay)

TVFA

Alarm time

(Definite time delay)

Scheme switch

[V/F1] to [V/F5] Off/On

[V/FA] Off/On

(**)

Enable or disable tripping

Enable or disable alarm

(∗): Multiplier of (rated voltage) / (rated frequency)

(**): Refer to Appendix H for default setting.

A: Alarm level

H: High level (definite time tripping)

V/Hz

L: Low level (pick up level)

HT: Operating time at high level

LT: Operating time at low level

TVFH: Operating time at high level setting

TVFA: Alarm time

Withstand curve for transformer overexcitation

sec

0 TVFA

TVFH

(log T)

Figure 2.7.2 Setting Points

⎯ 47 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.8 Trip by External Devices

Up to four binary signals EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP1 to EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP4 can be

used for tripping external devices. Figure 2.8.1 shows the scheme logic for the signal

EXT_MEC.TP1. The signal can trip up to five breakers. Any of the tripping signals

EXT_MEC.TP1-1 to EXT_MEC.TP4-5 can be blocked by the scheme switches [M.T1-1] to

[M.T1-5] setting.

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with EXT_MEC.TP1-4 and EXT_MEC.TP1-5, and

[M.T1-4] and [M.T1-5].

The other binary signals have the same scheme logic.

1536

EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP1

EXT_MEC.TP1-1

EXT_MEC.TP1-2

[M.T1-1]

[M.T1-2]

[M.T1-3]

[M.T1-4]

[M.T1-5]

EXT_MEC.TP1-3

EXT_MEC.TP1-4

EXT_MEC.TP1-5

357

MEC.TRIP1

≥1

Figure 2.8.1

Scheme Logic of Trip by External Device

Setting

The following shows the setting elements for tripping by external devices and their setting ranges.

Element

Range

Step

Default

Remarks

Scheme switch

Enable or disable tripping

EXT_MEC.TP1-1 to -5

EXT_MEC.TP2-1 to -5

EXT_MEC.TP3-1 to -5

EXT_MEC.TP4-1 to -5

Off/On

(*)

(*): Default settings are dependent on the model. See Appendix H.

⎯ 48 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.9 Tripping Output

Figure 2.9.1 shows the tripping logic. Each protection can output five tripping signals to enable

tripping for five breakers. The tripping signals are set according to the number of breakers to be

tripped and drive the heavy duty, high-speed tripping output relays TRIP-1 to TRIP-5.

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with TRIP-4 and TRIP-5.

When the scheme switch [L/O] is set to “ON”, tripping signals can be locked and reset with the

〔RESET〕key on the front panel. When the switch is set to “OFF”, they are reset automatically

after clearing the fault.

The tripping output relays reset 200ms after the tripping signal disappears. When [L/O] is set to

“OFF”, the tripping circuit must be opened with the auxiliary contact of the breaker prior to reset

of the tripping relay to prevent the tripping relay from directly interrupting the tripping current of

the breaker.

⎯ 49 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TRIP-1

[L/O]

“ON”

Tripping output

relay

DIFT-1

284

TRIP-1

≥1

F/F

≥1

1OC-1

1OCI-1

1REF-1

1EF-1

0.2s

≥1

1EFI-1

≥1

[RESET]

2OC-1

2OCI-1

2REF-1

2EF-1

2EFI-1

3OC-1

3OCI-1

3REF-1

3EF-1

3EFI-1

FRQ-1

V/F-1

≥1

THR-1

MECHANICAL TRIP1-1

MECHANICAL TRIP2-1

MECHANICAL TRIP3-1

MECHANICAL TRIP4-1

≥1

TRIP-2

291

298

305

312

TRIP-2

TRIP-3

TRIP-4

TRIP-5

Same as TRIP-1

0.2s

TRIP-3

Same as TRIP-1

0.2s

TRIP-4

Same as TRIP-1

0.2s

TRIP-5

Same as TRIP-1

0.2s

Figure 2.9.1 Tripping Logic

⎯ 50 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.10 Characteristics of Measuring Elements

2.10.1 Percentage Current Differential Element DIF

The segregated-phase current differential element DIF has dual percentage restraining

characteristics. Figure 2.10.1 shows the characteristics of DF1 and DF2 on the differential current

(I ) and restraining current (I ) plane. I is a vector summation of phase current of all windings

and I is a scalar summation of phase current of all windings.

I = 2I (one-end infeed)

DF2

DF1

Figure 2.10.1 Current Differential Element

Characteristic DF1 is expressed by the following equation:

I ≥ p1 x I + (1 −p1/2)ik

where,

p1 : slope of DF1

ik : minimum operating current

Id and Ir are defined as follows for a three-winding transformer.

I_d= | kct1⋅I₁+ kct2⋅I₂+ kct3⋅I₃|

I_r=(kct1⋅|I₁|+ kct2⋅|I₂|+ kct3⋅|I₃|)/2

where,

kct1 ,kct2 ,kct3 : CT ratio matching settings of primary, secondary and tertiary winding

I₁,I₂,I₃: currents of primary, secondary and tertiary winding

This characteristic has weaker restraint in the small current region and ensures sensitivity to low

level faults.

Characteristic DF2 is expressed by the following equation:

I ≥ p2 x I + (p1 −p2)kp + (1 −p1/2)ik

where,

p2 : slope of DF2

kp : break point of DF1 characteristic

This characteristic has stronger restraint in the large current region and ensures stability against

CT saturation during through faults.

⎯ 51 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.10.2 High-set Overcurrent Element HOC

High-set overcurrent element HOC is an instantaneous overcurrent characteristic, and is applied in

the differential circuit. The characteristic is expressed by the following equation:

I ≥ kh

Id is defined as follows for three-winding transformer.

I_d= | kct1⋅I₁+ kct2⋅I₂+ kct3⋅I₃|

where,

kct1, kct2, kct3: CT ratio matching settings of primary, secondary and tertiary winding

HOC is an un-restrained current differential element which can protect a transformer against

damage due to a heavy internal fault, because it has a simple operation principle and high-speed

operation. Note that HOC is not immune to transformer inrush currents and therefore cannot be

applied with a sensitive setting.

2.10.3 Restricted Earth Fault Element REF

The restricted earth fault element REF is composed of REF_DIF and REF_DEF, as was shown in

Figure 2.3.2.

The REF_DIF has dual percentage restraining characteristics. Figure 2.10.2 shows the

characteristics on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane. Id is the

differential current between the residual current of each winding and the neutral current and Ir is

the restraining current which is the larger of the residual current and the neutral current.

DF2

DF1

max-kct⋅ik

Figure 2.10.2 REF_DIF Characteristic

Characteristic DF1 is expressed by the following equation:

I_d≥ p1⋅I_r+ (1-p1) ⋅ik⋅max-kct

where,

p1 : slope of DF1 (fixed to 10%)

ik : minimum operating current

max-kct : CT ratio matching of line CT to neutral CT (when plural line CTs are applied,

maximum kct is employed.)

For the 1REF element, I_dand I_rare calculated by the following equations when applied to a circuit

with one neutral CT and three line CTs. (For the REF element application, see Appendix L.)

I_d= |1kct1⋅I_1o+ 1kct2⋅I_2o+ 1kct3⋅I_3o+ I_N|

⎯ 52 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

I_r= max.( 1kct1⋅|I_1a| , 1kct1⋅|I_1b| , 1kct1⋅|I_1c| , 1kct2⋅|I_2a| , 1kct2⋅|I_2b| , 1kct2⋅|I_2c| ,1kct3⋅|I_3a| ,

1kct3⋅|I_3b| , 1kct3⋅|I_3c| , |I_N| )

where,

I_1o,I_2o,I_3o: residual current of primary, secondary and tertiary winding

I_1a,I_1b,I_1c,I_2a,I_2b,I_2c,I_3a,I_3b,I_3c: phase current of primary, secondary and tertiary winding

I_N: residual current of neutral circuit

1kct1, 1kct2, 1kct3: CT ratio matching of primary, secondary and tertiary line CT to neutral

Characteristic DF2 is expressed by the following equation:

I_d≥ p2 (I_r−kp)

where

p2 : slope of DF2

kp : break point of DF1 characteristic

The characteristic of REF_DEF is composed of a directional characteristic and a non-directional

characteristic as shown in Figure 2.10.3 (a) and (b). This characteristic is employed so that the

REF is not blocked at one-end infeed current I_N.

90°

(*1)

3I₀

180°

0°

I_N

Ik2

3I₀

Ik1

Operating

270°

Ik1, ik2: Current sensitivity (0.01pu, 0.025pu fixed)

I_N: Neutral current of transformer

3I₀: Zero sequence current (calculated from Ia, Ib, Ic)

*1: MAX(Ia,Ib,Ic) ≤ 2×MAX(kct1,kct2,kct3)

(a)

(b)

Figure 2.10.3 REF_DEF Characteristic

The REF_DEF detects an internal fault by checking the direction between transformer neutral

current I_Nand zero-sequence current 3I₀calculated from phase currents I_a, I_band I_c. The REF_DEF

is blocked when the maximum phase current is larger than 2 times of Max-kct as follows:

Max.(1kct1•I_1a, ….1kct3•I_3c) ≥ I_BLK=Max.(1kct1,1kct2,1kct3)×2

⎯ 53 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

(Example)

Primary

Secondary

CT ratio: 2400/1

CT ratio: 3600/1

kct1=2

I₀₁

kct2=3

I₀₂

max-kct = 3

Therefore, REF is blocked at

_BLK=3×2.0=6A (CT secondary)

CT ratio:

1200/1

I_N

If the maximum of phase

currents of both primary and

secondary windings is 7200A

(=6x1200A), the REF is blocked.

Reference current: 1200A

(Rated current of neutral CT)

1REF

2.10.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element OCI and EFI

The OCI and EFI elements have one long time inverse characteristic and three inverse time

characteristics in conformity with IEC 60255-3 as shown in Figure 2.10.4. One of these

characteristics can be selected.

These characteristics are expressed by the following equations and curves.

(s)

T=1.0

200

100

Long Time Inverse

120

(I/Is)−1

t = T ×

Standard Inverse

0.14

t = T ×

(I/Is)^0.02− 1

Long-time Inverse

Very Inverse

13.5

Operating

time

t = T ×

(I/Is) − 1

Standard Inverse

Very Inverse

Extremely Inverse

t = T ×

(I/Is)²− 1

where,

0.5

t : operating time

I : fault current

Is : current setting

T : time multiplier setting

0.2

0.1

Extremely Invease

20 30

Current I (Multiple of setting current)

Figure 2.10.4 Characteristics of Inverse Time Overcurrent Element

⎯ 54 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.10.5 Definite Time Overcurrent element OC and EF

The OC and EF elements measure the phase currents and the residual current respectively.

2.10.6 Thermal Overload Element THR

Thermal overload element THR has a characteristic based on thermal replica according to the IEC

60255-8 standard (see Appendix N), which evaluates the phase current (A-phase) of the CT

secondary circuits. Figure 2.10.5 shows the characteristic of THR element. The element has trip

and alarm stages.

Trip stage:

I²− Ip²

I − (k x I_B)

t = τ x Ln

Alarm stage:

(I²− Ip²) x (1 − T /τ)

t = τ x Ln

I²− (k x I_B)²

where

t : operating time

τ : thermal time constant

I : load current

kxI : allowable overload current as specified in IEC 60255-8 (refer to Appendix N)

I : basic current of transformer (rated current)

k : constant (allowable overload current / I )

Ip : prior load current before the overload occurs

: time for alarm

(Alarming time = t (operating time) – T

A (setting time)

Ln : natural logarithm

Figure 2.10.6 shows the thermal curve for a range of time constant settings in the cold state when

the prior load current Ip is zero.

⎯ 55 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Trip

Alarm

K ⋅ I

Figure 2.10.5 Characteristic of Thermal Overload Element

Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no

prior load)

10000

1000

100

500

100

0.1

0.01

Overload Current (Multiple of kI_B)

Figure 2.10.6 Thermal Curves

⎯ 56 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2.10.7 Frequency Element FRQ

GRT100 has two elements for trip or alarm. Each element operates either in overfrequency or

underfrequency.

2.10.8 Overexcitation Element V/F

The characteristic is based on the ratio of voltage to frequency. The alarm is definite time

delayed, while the tripping characteristic is either definite time or inverse time, as shown in

Figure 2.10.7.

A: Alarm level

H: High level (definite time tripping)

V/Hz

L: Low level (pick up level)

HT: Operating time at high level

LT: Operating time at low level

TVFH: Operating time at high level setting

TVFA: Alarm time

sec

0 TVFA

TVFH

(log T)

Figure 2.10.7 Characteristic of Overexcitation Element

The inverse time characteristic of V/F is expressed by the following equation.

K₂

t =

(V/F) − K₁

where,

t : operating time

V : voltage (any phase-to-phase voltage)

F : frequency

V/F=(Vm/Fm) / (Vs/Fs)

(Vm: Input voltage, Fm: Input frequency, Vs: Setting of rated voltage, Fs: Rated frequency)

(LT) × L − (HT) × H

K₁=

(LT) − (HT)

(LT) × (HT) × (H − L)

K₂=

(LT) − (HT)

The V/F element has a reset feature with definite time reset (RT). When the V/F falls below the

reset threshold, the integral state of the inverse time function is reset to the initial value after the

RT time.

Example: V/F=(Vin/Fin)/(V/Fs)=(130/50)/(100/50)=1.3, in case of Vin: Input voltage (130V),

Fin: Input frequency (50Hz), V: Rated voltage (100V), Fs: Rated frequency (50Hz)

⎯ 57 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3. Technical Description

3.1 Hardware Description

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules

The case outline of GRT100 is shown in Appendix F.

The hardware structures of the models are shown in Figure 3.1.1 and Figure 3.1.2. The front

view shows the equipment without the human machine interface module.

The GRT100 consists of the following hardware modules. The human machine interface module

is provided with the front panel.

• Transformer module (VCT)

• Signal processing module (SPM)

• Binary input and output module #1 (IO1 or IO8)

• Binary input and output module #2 (IO2)

• Binary output module #3 (IO3)

• Human machine interface module (HMI)

Front view without front panel

VCT

IO2 SPM IO1 or

IO8

Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure (Model: 101, 201, 203)

⎯ 58 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

VCT

IO3 IO2 SPM IO1 or

IO8

Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Structure (Model: 102, 202, 204)

The correspondence between each model and module used is as follows:

Models 101

102

201

202

203

204

Module

VCT

SPM

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO8

HMI

Note: The VCT and SPM modules are not interchangeable among different models.

The hardware block diagram of the GRT100 using these moduls is shown in Figure 3.1.3.

⎯ 59 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Binary I/O Module (IO1 or IO8)

DC/DC

Converter

supply

Transformer

Signal Processing Module (SPM)

Module (VCT)

Binary input

×13 or 12

CT 8

A/D

Analogue

filter

Binary output

(High speed)

Converter

or CT 12

Trip

command

MPU1

AC input

or CT 15

5 or 3

VT 1

Binary I/O Module (IO2)

Opt. I/F

Ethernet

LAN I/F

Binary output

×14

External

clock

IRIG-B

port

Binary input

RS485

Remote

Transceiver

Setting and

Monitoring

System

Human Machine Interface (HMI)

Remote PC

Liquid crystal display

(*1)

Binary I/O Module (IO3)

40characters×4lines

Binary output

Operation keys

Monitoring jacks

LEDs

Local

Personal

RS232C

I/F

Computer

(*1) I03: required for Model 102, 202, 204

Figure 3.1.3 Hardware Block Diagram (Models 101, 102, 201, 202, 203 and 204)

⎯ 60 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.1.2 Transformer Module

The transformer module (VCT module) provides isolation between the internal and external

circuits through auxiliary transformers and transforms the magnitude of the AC input signals to

suit the electronic circuits. The AC input signals are as follows:

• three-phase currents (I , I and I ) for each winding

a b

• neutral current (I ) for each winding

• phase-to-phase voltage

Figure 3.1.4 shows a block diagram of the transformer module. There are 8 to 12 auxiliary CTs

and 1 auxiliary VT mounted in the transformer module depending on the relay model. (For the

correspondence between the relay model and number of AC input signals, see Table 3.2.1.)

The transformer module is also provided with an IRIG-B port. This port collects the serial

IRIG-B format data from an external clock for synchronization of the relay calendar clock. The

IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler. A BNC connector is used as

the input connector.

Signal

processing

module

IRIG-B port

External

clock

BNC connector

Figure 3.1.4 Transformer Module (e.g. models 101, 102)

⎯ 61 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.1.3 Signal Processing Module

The signal processing and communication module (SPM) incorporates a signal processing

circuit and a communication control circuit. Figure 3.1.3.1 shows the block diagram.

The signal processing circuit consists of an analog filter, multiplexer, analog to digital (A/D)

converter, main processing unit (MPU) and memories (RAM and ROM), and executes all kinds

of processing including protection, measurement, recording and display.

The SPM contains a lithium-ion battery, which should be removed at the end-of-life of the

product. The nominal backup time of a lithium-ion battery is one year after the shipment from

the factory.

The analog filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current and voltage signals.

The A/D converter has a resolution of 16 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies

of 2400Hz (at 50Hz) and 2880Hz (at 60Hz).

The MPU carries out operations for the measuring elements and scheme logic operations for

protection, recording, displaying and signal transmission control.

The SPM can be provided with Optical interface or Ethernet LAN interface for serial

communication system.

Analog filter

A/D

converter

MPU

Other

modules

Analog filter

Multiplexer

Analog

input

RAM

ROM

Link with Serial

communication

system

Optical I/F

(Option)

Ethernet LAN

I/F (Option)

Figure 3.1.3.1 Signal Processing Module

⎯ 62 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.1.4 Binary Input and Output Module

There are four types of binary input and output module (IO module): These modules are fitted

according to the model (see Section 3.1.1).

3.1.4.1 IO1 and IO8 Module

IO1 and IO8 provide a DC/DC converter, binary inputs and binary outputs for tripping.

As shown in Figure 3.1.4.1, the IO1 module incorporates a DC/DC converter, 15 photo-coupler

circuits (BI) for binary input signals and 6 auxiliary relays (TP1 to 5) dedicated to the circuit

breaker tripping command.

As shown in Figure 3.1.4.2, the IO8 module incorporates a DC/DC converter, 12 photo-coupler

circuits (BI) for binary input signals and 3 auxiliary relays (TP) dedicated to the circuit breaker

tripping command. The 12 binary inputs have dedicated positive and negative inputs suitable for

double-pole switching.

The nominal input voltage rating of the DC/DC converter is 24V, 48V, 110V/125V or

220V/250V. The normal range of input voltage is −20% to +20%.

The five or three tripping command auxiliary relays are the high-speed operation type and have

one normally open output contact.

supply

Line filter

(+)

(−)

DC/DC

converter

Photo-coupler

Auxiliary relay

(high speed)

TP-1

Binary

input

signals

TP-2

TP-3

Tripping

command

(× 15)

TP-4

TP-5

Figure 3.1.4.1 IO1 Module

⎯ 63 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IO8 module

Line filter

DC/DC

converter

(+)

supply

(−)

Photo-coupler

Auxiliary relay

(high speed)

TP-1

Tripping

command

(× 3)

Binary

input

signals

TP-2

TP-3

(× 12)

Figure 3.1.4.2 IO8 Module

⎯ 64 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.1.4.2 IO2 Module

As shown in Figure 3.1.4.3, the IO2 module incorporates 3 photo-coupler circuits (BI14-BI16) for

binary input signals, 14 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO13 and FAIL) for binary output signals and an

RS-485 transceiver.

The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally closed contact, and operates when a relay failure or

abnormality in the DC circuit is detected. BO1 to BO13 each have one normally open contact.

BO12 and BO13 are the high-speed operation type.

The RS-485 transceiver is used for the link with the relay setting and monitoring (RSM) system.

The external signal is isolated from the relay internal signal.

Auxiliary relay

BO1

Photo-coupler

BI14

BO2

FAIL

Binary

output

signals

Binary

input

signals

BI15

BI16

RS-485

Transceiver

Link with RSM

system

RS-485

Transceiver

Link with

IEC60870-5-103

Communication

system

Figure 3.1.4.3 IO2 Module

⎯ 65 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.1.4.3 IO3 Module

The IO3 module is used to increase the number of binary outputs.

The IO3 module incorporates 10 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO10) for binary outputs. All auxiliary

relays each have one normally open contact.

IO3 module

Auxiliary relay

BO1

BO2

Binary

output

signals

BO9

BO10

Figure 3.1.4.4 IO3 Module

⎯ 66 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.1.5 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module

The operator can access the GRT100 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown

in Figure 3.1.5, the HMI module has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),

view and reset keys, operation keys, testing jacks and an RS-232C connector on the front panel.

The LCD consists of 40 columns by 4 rows with a backlight and displays record, status and setting

data.

There are a total of 8 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label

Color

Green

Red

Remarks

IN SERVICE

TRIP

Lit when relay is in service.

Lit when trip command is issued.

Lit when failure is detected.

ALARM

TESTING

Red

Lit when disabling automatic monitoring function or resetting

the time counting of THR and V/F elements by the

scheme switches.

Red

(LED1)

(LED2)

(LED3)

(LED4)

Red

LED1 to LED4 are user-configurable.

Once it has started operating, the TRIP LED continues to operate even after the trip command

disappears. Pressing the RESET key resets it. Other LEDs operate as long as a signal is present.

The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs.

The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The reset key clears the

LCD indication and turns off the LCD backlight.

The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the

settings or change the settings.

The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the

test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by

selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" or "Variable Timer List" and setting it in

the window and the signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the

"Signal List" or "Variable Timer List", see Appendix B or C.)

The RS-232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS-232C connection. This

connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

⎯ 67 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

GRT100

101D-21-11

Operation

keys

Figure 3.1.5 Front Panel

⎯ 68 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 Input Signals

AC input signals

Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for each of the GRT100 models and their

respective input terminal numbers. See Appendix G for external connections.

Winding 1, 2 and 3 in the Table correspond to high-voltage or primary, medium-voltage or

secondary, and low-voltage or tertiary winding respectively.

Table 3.2.1

Terminal GRT100-101, 102

AC Input Signals

Terminal GRT100-201, 202, 203, 204

No.

TB1

1-2

A phase current of winding 1

1-2

A phase current of winding 1

B phase current of winding 1

C phase current of winding 1

Neutral current of winding 1

A phase current of winding 2

B phase current of winding 2

C phase current of winding 2

Neutral current of winding 2

A phase current of winding 3

B phase current of winding 3

C phase current of winding 3

Neutral current of winding 3

⎯

3-4

B phase current of winding 1

3-4

5-6

C phase current of winding 1

5-6

7-8

Neutral current of winding 1

7-8

9-10

A phase current of winding 2

9-10

11-12

13-14

15-16

17-18

19-20

21-22

23-24

25-26

27-28

B phase current of winding 2

11-12

13-14

15-16

17-18

19-20

21-22

23-24

25-26

27-28

C phase current of winding 2

Neutral current of winding 2

⎯

Phase to phase voltage of

winding 1

Phase to phase voltage of

winding 1

(earth)

Binary input signals

Table 3.2.2 shows the binary input signals necessary for the GRT100, their driving contact

conditions and functions enabled. See Appendix G for external connections.

The binary input circuit of the GRT100 is provided with a logic level inversion function as shown

in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISW which can be used to select either

normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or

normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions indicated in

Table 3.2.2 then the BISW can be set to “N” (normal). If not, then “I” (inverted) should be

selected.

The default setting of the BISW is "N" (normal) for all input signals.

Further, all binary input functions are programmable by PLC (Programmable Logic Circuit)

function.

If a signal is not required, the function concerned is disabled.

The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and 138V

DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating and

125V DC at 220/250V DC.

⎯ 69 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Table 3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

Signal Names

Driving Contact Condition / Function Enabled

BISW∗ (default)

External Mechanical trip Closed when external device operated. / Initiate trip command

(EXT_MEC.TP1) from operation of external device.

External Mechanical trip Closed when external device operated. / Initiate trip command

(EXT_MEC.TP2) from operation of external device.

External Mechanical trip Closed when external device operated. / Initiate trip command

(EXT_MEC.TP3) from operation of external device.

External Mechanical trip Closed when external device operated. / Initiate trip command

(EXT_MEC.TP4)

Indication reset

from operation of external device.

Closed to reset TRIP LED indication. / Reset indication

externally.

Protection block

Closed to block the protection. / Block the protection

externally.

Signal for event record

Closed when external device operated. / Initiate event record

with external signal.

Closed when external device operated. / Initiate event record

with external signal.

Closed when external device operated. / Initiate event record

with external signal.

Signal No.

GRT100

(+)

(−)

BI1

External Mechanical trip

BISW1 (Norm)

Protection

schemes

BI1

BI2

BI3

PLC function

(Inv)

BI2

BI3

External Mechanical trip

BISW2 (Norm)

Programmable

logic

(Inv)

BISW3 (Norm)

(Inv)

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

3.2.2

Binary Output Signals

The number of output binary signals and their output terminals vary depending on the relay model.

See Appendix G for details. For all models, all outputs except the tripping command, signal for

command protections and relay failure signal can be configured.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relay individually

or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit

with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be configured according to the

setting menu. Appendix D shows the factory default settings.

A 0.2s delayed drop-off timer can be attached to these assigned signals. The delayed drop-off time

is disabled by the scheme switch [BOTD].

The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit

is detected.

⎯ 70 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal List

+(ON)

−(OFF)

BOTD

Auxiliary relay

Appendix C

6 GATES

≧1

0.2s

≧1

Figure 3.2.2 Configurable Output

3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

GRT100 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logics on binary

signals. The sequence logics with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, NOT logics, etc. can be produced

by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay elements or

binary circuits.

Configurable binary inputs, binary outputs and LEDs, and the initiation trigger of disturbance

record are programmed by the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated

logics or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.

PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC editor tool. For PLC tool, refer to

PLC tool instruction manual.

Figure 3.2.3

Sample Screen of PLC Tool

⎯ 71 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for

a power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the

automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal

operation by itself, plays an important role. A numerical relay based on microprocessor

technology is able to implement such as automatic supervision function. GRT100 implements an

automatic supervision function based on the following concept:

• The supervising function should not affect protection performance.

• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.

• When a failure occurs, it should be possible to easily identify the failure location.

Note: Automatic supervision function includes automatic monitor function and automatic test

function. For the terminology, refer to IEC IEV 60448.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing

The relay is supervised with the following items.

AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored such that the following equation is satisfied and the health of

the AC input circuit is checked.

Max(|I |, |I |, |I |) − 4 × Min(|I |, |I |, |I |) ≥ k

where,

Max(|I |, |I |, |I |) = Maximum amplitude among I , I and I

a b

Min(|I |, |I |, |I |) = Minimum amplitude among I , I and I

a b

k = 20% of rated current

A/D accuracy checking

An analogue reference voltage is transmitted to a prescribed channel in the analogue-to-digital

(A/D) converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range

and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Memory monitoring

The memories are monitored as follows depending on the type of the memory and checked that the

memory circuits are healthy:

• Random access memory monitoring:

Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.

• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.

• Setting value monitoring:

Checks discrepancy between the setting values stored in

duplicate.

Watchdog Timer

A hardware timer which is cleared periodically by software is provided and it is checked that the

software is running normally.

⎯ 72 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

DC Supply monitoring

The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored and checked that the

DC voltage is within a prescribed range.

3.3.3 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring

If there is a failure in PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data, the function may be stopped.

Therefore, the PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data are monitored and an alarm of "PLC stop" or

"MAP stop" is issued if any failure detected.

3.3.4 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring

The sending and receiving functions in the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The

receiving function is executed by checking GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending

function is executed by checking Ping response to the other party. If a failure is detected, an alarm

of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is issued.

These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GSECHK] and [PINGCHK].

3.3.5 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with LCD display, LEDs

indication, external alarms and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and

alarms.

The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen which is displayed automatically

VIEW

when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the

key. The event record messages

are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

Those alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.

Those alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to OFF. The setting

is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning test or maintenance.

When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software fails to run normally, LCD display and event

recording on the failure cannot be expected.

DC supply failure disables the LCD display and event recording on the failure as well.

For the discrimination of the two failures mentioned above, refer to Section 6.7.2.

Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms

Supervision Item

LCD Message LED

LED

Ext. alarm

Event record

Message

"IN SERVICE" "ALARM"

AC input

imbalance monitoring

(1)

On/Off (2)

Off

(4)

CT err

Relay fail

A/D accuracy check

CPU, Memory monitoring

Watchdog Timer

A/D err

(1)

Relay fail

----

Off

(3)

(4)

----

DC supply monitoring

----

Relay fail

PLC data or IEC61850

mapping data monitoring

PLC stop or

MAP stop

(4)

Relay fail-A

GOOSE message check

GOOSE stop

⎯ 73 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Supervision Item

LCD Message LED

LED

Ext. alarm

Event record

Message

"IN SERVICE" "ALARM"

Ping response check

Ping err

on on

(4)

Relay fail-A

(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with "---fail" in the Table in Section 6.7.2.

(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to

"ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.4).

(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drops.

(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.

3.3.6 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long

as the failure exists and restored when the failure is removed.

• A/D accuracy check

• Memory monitoring

• Watchdog Timer

• DC supply monitoring

When a failure is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]

setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is initiated, or, if only an

alarm is initiated.

3.3.7 Setting

The setting elements necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the

table below.

Element

Range

Step

Default

ALM&BLK

OFF

Remarks

[SVCNT]

ALM&BLK / ALM

OFF/ON

Alarming and/or blocking

GOOSE check

[GSECHK]

[PINGCHK]

OFF/ON

OFF

Ping response check

⎯ 74 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.4 Recording Function

GRT100 is provided with the following recording functions:

Fault recording

Event recording

Disturbance recording

These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRT100 or PLC command by user-setting

(max. 8) and the following items are recorded for one fault:

Date and time of fault occurrence

Operating phase or fault phase

Tripping command

Tripping mode

Power system quantities

Up to the 8 most-recent faults can be stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults

have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then

stored.

Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock.

To be precise, this is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated, and thus it is

approximately 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault.

Operating phase or fault phase

The operating phase or fault phase can be selected to be displayed following tripping, depending

on the requirements of user.

For details, see Section 2.3.1.

Tripping command

The tripping output relay(s) operated is shown in terms of its number (e.g. TP-1: 1, TP-2: 2 etc.).

Tripping mode

This shows the protection scheme that initiated the tripping command.

Power system quantities

The following power system quantities for pre-fault and post-fault are recorded.

Magnitude and phase angle of phase current of each winding (I , I , I up to I , I , I )

a1 b1 c1 a3 b3 c3

Magnitude and phase angle of neutral current of each winding (I up to I

)

Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current of each winding (I , I , I

11 21 01

up to I , I , I

)

13 23 03

Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (V)

⎯ 75 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Magnitude of phase differential current (I

I )

da, db, dc

Magnitude of residual differential current for REF protection (I

up to I

)

d03

d01

Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)

Phase angles above are expressed taking that of the voltage as a reference phase angle. If the

voltage input is not provided, then the positive sequence current of the primary winding is used as

a reference phase angle.

3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. The user

can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event items can be

assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On” (only

recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by setting.

The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger events”

is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On” mode.

The name of an event cannot be set on LCD. It can set only by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters

can be set and can be viewed on both of the LCD and RSM Setting(view) screen. But the LCD

screen of event record displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11

characters are set.

The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix H.

Element

Range

0 - 128

0 - 3071

Step

Default

Remarks

BITRN

100

Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events

Assign the signal number

EV1 – EV128

Up to 1024 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 1024 records have been

stored, the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance Recording is started when overcurrent starter elements operate or a tripping command

is output, or PLC command by user-setting (max. 4: Signal No. 2632 to 2635) is output. The

records include 13 analog signals (primary: I , I , I , I , secondary: I , I , I , I

a1 b1 c1 n1 a2 b2 c2 n2

tertiary: I , I , I , I , voltage: V), 32 binary signals and the dates and times at which

a3 b3 c3 n3

recording started. Any binary signal in shown in Appendix B can be assigned by the binary signal

setting of disturbance record. The default setting of binary signal is shown in Appendix H.

The name of binary signal can be set only by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set and can

be viewed on both of the LCD and RSM Setting(view) screen. But the waveform data analysis

screen of disturbance record displays up to 11 characters of them. Therefore, it is recommended

the maximum 11 characters are set.

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be

displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software

instruction manual.

The post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 3.0s and the default setting is 1.0s. The

pre-fault recording time depends on the post recording time. The pre-fault recording time is fixed

at 0.3s.

⎯ 76 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate

relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in

Table 3.4.2.

Note: If the recording time setting is changed, all previously recorded data is deleted.

Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored

Recording

time

Model

0.1s

0.5s

1.0s

1.5s

2.0s

2.5s

3.0s

Frequency

101,102

50Hz

60Hz

50Hz

60Hz

201,202

203,204

Disturbance recording is initiated when overcurrent elements operate, a tripping signal is output,

2F or 5F element operates or external event signals are input. Three phase overcurrent elements

1OCP-S to 3OCP-S are applied to the line CTs and neutral overcurrent elements 1OCP-G to

3OCP-G to the neutral CTs.

The initiations are blocked by the scheme switches.

Settings

The elements necessary for starting disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in the

table below.

Element

1OCP-S

2OCP-S

3OCP-S

1OCP-G

2OCP-G

3OCP-G

Range

Step

0.01

Default(**)

Remarks

0.10 - 20.00(*)

0.05 - 20.00(*)

ON/OFF

Phase overcurrent element

Neutral overcurrent element

Scheme switch

TRIP1 to TRIP5

1OCPS to 3OCPS

1OCPG to 3OCPG

Initiating disturbance record

by tripping

by phase overcurrent element

by neutral overcurrent element

by 2F element

by 5F element

EVENT1 to EVENT3

by external event

(*) : Multiplier of CT secondary rated current

(**): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.

⎯ 77 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3.5 Metering Function

The GRT100 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The

measurement data shown below are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local

or remote PC.

Magnitude and phase angle of phase current of each winding (I , I , I up to I , I , I )

a1 b1 c1 a3 b3 c3

Magnitude and phase angle of neutral current of each winding (I up to I

)

Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current of each winding (I , I , I

11 21 01

up to I , I , I

)

13 23 03

Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (V)

Magnitude of phase differential current (I I )

da, db, dc

Magnitude of residual differential current for REF protection (I

Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)

Frequency

up to I

)

d03

d01

Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage as a reference phase

angle, where leading phase angles are expressed as positive values.

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side

of the CT according to a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio and

VT ratio too. For the setting method, see "Setting the transformer parameters" in 4.2.6.7.

⎯ 78 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4. User Interface

4.1 Outline of User Interface

The user can access the relay from the front panel.

Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an

RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and

Monitoring), IEC103 communication via an RS485, optical fibre or Ethernet LAN etc.

This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of

the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 3.1.13, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light

RESET

keys, monitoring jack and RS232C

emitting diodes (LED), operation keys,

connector.

and

VIEW

LCD

The LCD screen, provided with a 4-line, 40-character back-light, displays detailed information of

the relay interior such as records, status and setting. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but

pressing the

key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than

VIEW

RESET

and

will display the menu screen.

END

RESET

These screens are turned off by pressing the

key or

key. If any display is left for 5

minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.

LED

There are 8 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colours are defined as follows:

Label

Color

Remarks

IN SERVICE Green

Lit when the relay is in service.

Lit when a trip command is issued.

Lit when a failure is detected.

TRIP

Red

ALARM

TESTING

Lit when disabling automatic monitoring function or resetting the

time counting of THR and V/F elements by the scheme

switches.

(LED1)

(LED2)

(LED3)

(LED4)

Red

Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.

LED1 to LED4 are configurable.

The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command

RESET

goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the

key. Other LEDs are lit as

RESET

long as a signal is present and the

key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.

⎯ 79 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Operation keys

The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to

input or change set values. The function of each key is as follows:

c 0-9, −:

Used to enter a selected number, numerical values and text strings.

Used to move between lines displayed on a screen

Keys 2, 4, 6 and 8 marked with

strings.

and

are also used to enter text

CANCEL

: Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

Used to end entry operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the display.

Used to store or establish entries.

END

ENTER

VIEW and RESET keys

Pressing

key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault" and "Auto-

VIEW

supervision".

RESET

Pressing

key turns off the display.

Monitoring jacks

The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is

selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and

setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an

oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.

RS232C connector

The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local

personal computer.

⎯ 80 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following 3 individual interfaces are mounted as the communication ports:

•

RS232C port

Serial communication port (RS485 port, optional Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN etc.)

IRIG-B port

(1) RS232C port

This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and

mounted on the front panel. By connecting with a personal computer using this connector, setting

operation and display functions can be performed on the personal computer.

(2) Serial communication port

Two serial communication ports can be provided. In one port, it is connected to the RSM (Relay

Setting and Monitoring system) via the protocol converter G1PR2 or IEC60870-5-103

communication via BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between

relays and to construct a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.)

In another port, it is connected to the substation automation system via Ethernet communication

networks using IEC 61850 protocol.

Screw terminal for RS485, ST connector for fibre optic, or 100Base-TX (RJ-45 connector) or

100Base-FX (SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided on the back of the relay as shown in

Figure 4.1.1.

(3) IRIG-B port

The IRIG-B port is mounted on the transformer module. This port collects serial IRIG-B format

data from the external clock to synchronize the relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated

from the external circuit by using a photocoupler. A BNC connector is used as the input connector.

This port is provided on the back of the relay and Figure 4.1.1 shows the location of this connector.

36-pin terminal block

20-pin terminal block

100Base-TX

(RJ45, option)

IRIG BNC

connector

Opt. I/F for IEC103

(ST, option)

RS485

connection

terminal

100Base-FX

(SC, option)

Figure 4.1.1 Locations of Communication Port

⎯ 81 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the

LCD display and operation keys.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

Displays during normal operation

When the GRT100 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.

Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Metering",

"Latest fault" and "Auto-supervision" screens in turn. The last two screens are displayed only

when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without

entering the menu screens.

Mete ri n g

0 8/ Dec / 1997

22 : 56

Ia1 ** * . * kA

Ib1 ** * . * kA

Ic1 ** * . * kA

I a2 ** . **kA

I b2 ** . **kA

I c2 ** . **kA

I n1 ** . **kA

I n2 ** . **kA

Mete ri n g

0 8/ Dec / 1997

22 : 56

Ia3 ** * . * kA

Ib3 ** * . * kA

Ic3 ** * . * kA

I n3 ** . **kA

** * . *kV

**. *H z

Note: I 1 for primary(high-voltage) winding current

I 2 for secondary(medium-voltage) winding current

I 3 for tertiary(low-voltage) winding current

Ia , Ib , Ic for phase current

In for neutral current

RESET

Press the

key to turn off the LCD.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Displays in tripping

Late st fa ul t

08 /De c/ 199 7

Tr ip

22 :5 6: * *. * **

1-2 -3- 4 -5

Phas e

DIFT

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and

other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping.

Press the

key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.

key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.

VIEW

RESET

Notes:

1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED4) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of

RESET

tripping, press the

key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off

the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.

RESET

2) Then, press the

key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning

⎯ 82 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.

RESET

3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the

key in short period, press the

RESET

key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other

digest screens. LED1 through LED4 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active

state.

Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation

LED lighting status

Operation

"TRIP" LED

Configurable LED

(LED1 - LED4)

Step 1

Step 2

RESET

Press the

key more than 3s on

the "Latest fault" screen

continue to lit

turn off

RESET

Then, press the

key in short

period on the "Latest fault" screen

turn off

RESET

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and

To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:

END

keys do not function.

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the

key.

END

• Press the

key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the

key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.

VIEW

Displays in automatic supervision operation

A u t o - s u p e r v i s i o n

0 8 / D e c / 1 9 9 7

2 2 : 5 6

D I O e r r

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the

"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure and the

"ALARM" LED lights.

Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest

fault" screens.

RESET

Press the

key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,

the "ALARM" LED remains lit.

After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off

automatically.

If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed

and the "ALARM" LED lights.

Notes:

⎯ 83 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED4) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an

RESET

alarm, press the

2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing

again to reset remained LED in the above manner.

3) LED1 through LED4 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.

key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.

RESET

key

key in short period, press

RESET

While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and

keys do not function. To

return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:

END

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the

key.

END

• Press the

key to turn off the LCD.

key to display the digest screen.

VIEW

RESET

key to turn off the LCD.

4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRT100. The main menu has five sub-menus,

"Record", "Status", "Setting (view)", "Setting (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu

hierarchy, see Appendix E.

⎯ 84 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Record

Status

Fault record

Event record

Disturbance record

Metering

Binary input & output

Relay element

Time synchronization source

Clock adjustment

Setting (view)

Relay version

Description

Communication

Record

Status

Protection

Binary input

Binary output

LED

Setting (change)

Password

Description

Communication

Record

Status

Protection

Binary input

Binary output

LED

Test

Switch

Binary output

Timer

Logic circuit

Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

⎯ 85 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Record

In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records and disturbance records are displayed or

erased.

Status

The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay

measuring element status, signal source for time synchronization (IRIG-B, RSM or IEC) and

adjusts the clock.

Setting (view)

The "Setting (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay

address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, configurable binary

inputs and outputs, and configurable LEDs.

Setting (change)

The "Setting (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay

address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, configurable binary

inputs and outputs, and configurable LEDs.

Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it has

password security protection.

Test

The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches, to forcibly operate binary output relays, to

measure variable timer time and to observe the binary signals in the logic circuit.

This menu also has password security protection.

RESET

keys to display the top

When the LCD is off, press any key other than the

and

VIEW

"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.

M EN U

1 = Re co r d

2 = Sta t us

4 = Set t in g( ch an g e)

3 = Se tt i ng (v ie w)

5 = Te st

RESET

To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the

RESET

key to turn

off the LCD, then press any key other than the

and

keys.

VIEW

END

Press the

key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.

An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer of

the screen, screen title and total number of lines of the screen. The last item is not displayed for all

the screens. "/6" displayed on the far left means that the screen is in the sixth hierarchical layer,

while 1/7 displayed on the far right means that the screen has seven lines excluding the top line and

that the cursor is on the first line.

To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the

window, use the

and

keys.

⎯ 86 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/6 V T & CT ra t io

1 / 7

1 C T

2 C T

(

1- 2 0 O00 ):

2 0 00

1 0 00

3 C T

(

4 00

2 0 O00 ):

1 n CT

2 n CT

(

1- 2 0 O0 0 ) :

1- 2 0 O00 ):

1- 2 0 O00 ) :

1- 2 0 O00 ):

1 00

3 n CT (

V T

1 00

4 00

(

To move to the lower screen or move from the left-side screen to the right-side screen in Appendix

E, select the appropriate number on the screen. To return to the higher screen or move from the

END

right-side screen to the left-side screen, press the

key.

CANCEL

The

key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully

because it may cancel entries made so far.

To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then

move to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records

The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records and disturbance records.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:

RESET

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and

keys.

• Select 1 (= Record) to display the "Record" sub-menu.

r d

/ 1 R e c o

1 = F a u l t r e c o r d

2 = E v e n t r e c o r d

3 = D i s t u r b a n c e r e c o r d

• Select 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.

R e c o r d

au l t

/ 2

2 = C l e a r

1 = Dis p l

a y

• Select 1 (= Display) to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the

top in new-to-old sequence.

/3 F au l t re co rd

1/ 4

16 / Oc t/ 19 97 1 8: 1 3: 57. 0 31

20 / Se p/ 19 97 1 5: 29 : 22 .4 6 3

04 / Ju l/ 19 97 1 1: 5 4: 53. 9 77

• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the

and

keys and press the

ENTER

key to display the details of the fault record.

⎯ 87 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

／４ＦａｕｌｔＲｅｃｏｒｄ＃１

３／４２

Date and Time

Fault phase

１６／Ｏｃｔ／１９９７

ＰｈａｓｅＢＣ

ＤＩＦＴ

１８：１３：５７．０３１

Ｔｒｉｐ

１-２-３-４-５

CB tripped

Tripping mode

Ｐｒｅｆａｕｌｔｖａｌｕｅｓ

Ｉａ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｂ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｃ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ１１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ２１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ０１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｎ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉａ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｂ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｃ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ１３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ２３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

＊＊＊．＊°

ｌａ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌｂ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌｃ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌ１２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌ２２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌ０２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌｎ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

＊＊＊．＊°

Ｉ０３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｎ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

＊＊＊．＊°

Power system

quantities

Ｖ

＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ

Ｉｄａ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

Ｉｄｂ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

ｌｄ０１＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

ｌｄ０２＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

Ｉｄｃ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

ｌｄ０３＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

Ｆａｕｌｔｖａｌｕｅｓ

Ｉａ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｂ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｃ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ１１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ２１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ０１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

＊＊＊．＊°

ｌａ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌｂ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌｃ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌ１２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌ２２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌ０２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

ｌｎ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

＊＊＊．＊°

Ｉｎ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉａ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｂ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｃ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ１３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ２３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉ０３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

Ｉｎ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ

＊＊＊．＊°

Ｖ

＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ

Ｉｄａ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

Ｉｄｂ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

Ｉｄｃ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

ＴＨＭ＊＊＊．＊％

ｌｄ０１＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

ｌｄ０２＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

ｌｄ０３＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ

Note: I 1 for primary(high-voltage) winding current

I 2 for secondary(medium-voltage) winding current

I 3 for tertiary(low-voltage) winding current

In for neutral current

I1 , I2 , I0 for symmetrical component current

Ida, Idb, Idc for differential current

Ido1, Ido2, Ido3 for zero-phase differential current in 1REF, 2REF, 3REF

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and

keys.

To clear all the fault records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select 1 (Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.

• Select 2 (= Clear) to display the following confirmation screen.

⎯ 88 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/ 2 F au lt re co rd

C lea r al l f au lt rec ord s?

ENT ER =Ye s

C AN CE L=N o

ENTER

• Press the

(= Yes) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not

displayed.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display events records, do the following:

RESET

keys.

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the

and

VIEW

• Select 1 (= Record) to display the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.

Rec o rd

ve n t

/ 2

2 = Clea r

1 = Dis p l

• Select 1 (= Display) to display the events with date and time from the top in new-to-old

sequence.

/3 Eve nt re co rd

2/ 48

Off

16/Oct /1998 2 3:18 :04. 2 94

16/Oct /1998 2 3:18 :03.9 13

12/Feb /1998 0 3:51 :37. 6 22

Trip

Rly .

ch ange

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and

keys.

To clear all the event records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select 2 (Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.

• Select 2 (= Clear) to display the following confirmation screen.

/2 E ve n t re co rd

Cl ea r a ll e ve nt r ec o rd s?

E NT ER =Y es

C ANC E L= No

ENTER

• Press the

(= Yes) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of the disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays

only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. To display them, do the

following:

(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

RESET

keys.

• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the

and

VIEW

⎯ 89 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

• Select 1 (= Record) to display the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select 3 (= Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.

reco rd

is t u rba n c e

/ 2

2 = Clea r

1 = Dis p l

• Select 1 (= Display) to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in

new-to-old sequence.

/3 D is t ur ba nc e re co r d

3/12

16 / Oc t/ 19 97 1 8: 1 3: 57. 0 31

20 / Se p/ 19 97 1 5: 29 : 22 .4 6 3

04 / Ju l/ 19 97 1 1: 5 4: 53. 9 77

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the

and keys.

To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select 3 (Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.

• Select 2 (= Clear) to display the following confirmation screen.

/2 D is t ur ba nc e re co r d

Cl ea r a ll d is tu rb an c e rec o rd s?

E NT ER =Y es

C ANC E L= No

ENTER

• Press the

(= Yes) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile

memory.

4.2.4 Displaying the Status

From the sub-menu of "Status", the following statuses can be displayed on the LCD:

Metering data of the protected transformer

Status of binary inputs and outputs

Status of measuring elements output

Status of time synchronization source

The data are renewed every second.

This sub-menu is also used to adjust the time of the internal clock.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following.

• Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

⎯ 90 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/1 S ta t us

1= Me te r in g

2= Bin a ry I /O

3= Re la y e le me nt

4= Tim e s yn c so u rce

5 = Cl oc k

a dj us tm e

• Select 1 (= Metering) to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g

1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7

1 8 : 1 3 3 / 2 0

I a 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I a 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I b 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I b 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I c 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I c 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 1 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I 1 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 2 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I 2 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 0 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I 0 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I n 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I n 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I a 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I b 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I c 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 1 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 2 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 0 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I n 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I d a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d 0 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d 0 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d 0 3 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

T H M ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ %

Frequency

∗ ∗ . ∗ H z

Note: I 1 for primary(high-voltage) winding current

I 2 for secondary(medium-voltage) winding current

I 3 for tertiary(low-voltage) winding current

Ia , Ib , Ic for phase current

In for neutral current

I1 , I2 , I0 for symmetrical component current

Ida, Idb, Idc for differential current

Ido1, Ido2, Ido3 for zero-phase differential current in 1REF, 2REF, 3REF

Metering data is expressed as primary values or secondary values depending on the setting. For

setting, see Section 4.2.6.6.

⎯ 91 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select 2 (= Binary I/O) to display the binary input and output status. (Binary inputs and outputs

depend oh the relay model.)

/2 B in a ry i np ut & o u tp ut

3/ 5

In pu t ( IO #1)

[0 0 0 0 00 00 0 000

]

In pu t ( IO #2 )

[0 0 0

)

Ou tp ut ( IO# 1 -t ri p

[0 00 00

Ou tp ut ( IO# 2 )

Ou tp ut ( IO# 3 )

[0 00 00 0 0 00 000 00 ]

[0 00 00 0 0 00 0

]

The display format is shown below.

[„

„

—

„

—

„]

—

Input (IO#1)

Input (IO#2)

BI1

BI2

BI3

BI4

—

BI5

—

BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12

BI14 BI15 BI16

—

Output (IO#1-trip) TP-1 TP-2 TP-3 TP-4 TP-5

Output (IO#2)

Output (IO#3)

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 FAIL BO13

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10

—

Lines 1 and 2 show the binary input status. BI1 to BI16 corresponds to each binary input signal.

For details of the binary input signals, see Appendix G. The status is expressed with logical level

"1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit. IO#1 and IO#2 in the table indicates the name of the

module containing the binary input circuits.

Lines 3 to 5 show the binary output status. TP-1 to TP-5 of line 3 corresponding to the tripping

command outputs. Models 203 and 204 are not provided with TP-4 and TP-5. FAIL of line 4

corresponds to the relay failure output. Other outputs expressed with BO1 to BO13 are

configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input

circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energized when the status is "1".

IO#1 to IO#3 in the table indicate the names of the module containing the binary output relays.

To display all the lines, press the

and

keys.

⎯ 92 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of the measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select 3 (= Relay element) to display the status of the relay elements.

/ 2 Re lay e le men t

3 / 9

D I F T

R E F

O C

[00 0 0 00 0 00 000

[00 0

]

[00 0 0 00 0 00

[00 0

O CI

E F

E FI

[00 0

T HR

V /F

[00

]

[00 0

F RQ

[000 0

]

The display format is as shown below.

[„

„

„]

DIF

HOC

—

DIFT

REF

—

1OC

2OC

3OC

1OCI

2OCI

3OCI

OCI

—

EFI

—

THR

V/F

—

FRQ

Line 1 shows the operation status of current differential elements. Line 2 shows the status of

restricted earth fault elements. Line 3 shows the status of overcurrent elements. Line 4 shows the

status of time overcurrent elements. Line 5 shows the status of the overcurrent element for earth

fault. Line 6 shows the status of time overcurrent elements for earth fault. Lines 7, 8 and 9 show

the status of thermal overload element, overexcitation element and frequency element

respectively.

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element

is in operation.

To display all the lines on the LCD, press the

and

keys.

⎯ 93 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronization Source

The inner clock of the GRT100 can be synchronized with external clocks such as the IRIG-B time

standard signal clock or RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) clock or by an

IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP server. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active or

inactive and which clock the relay is synchronized with, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select 4 (= Time sync source) to display the status of time synchronization sources.

/2 T im e s yn ch ro ni za t io n so u r ce

I R I G : I n a c t i ve

4 / 4

R S M :

I E C :

I n a c ti ve

*S NT P: Ac ti v e (S e r ve r ∗ )

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronized with the marked source

clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

For details of the setting time synchronization, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Adjusting the Time

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:

• Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select 5 (= Clock adjustment) to display the setting screen.

1 2 /F eb /1 99 8 22 : 56 :19

[ lo ca l]

1/ 5

Mi nu te (

59 ) :

23 ) :

31 ) :

4 1

2 2

1 2

Ho ur

Da y

(

Mo nt h (

Ye ar

1 -

12 ) :

( 199 0 - 20 89 ) :

1 99 8

Line 1 shows the current date, time and time synchronization source with which the internal clock

is synchronized. The time can be adjusted only when [Local] is indicated on the top line, showing

that the clock is running locally. When [IRIG] or [RSM] or [IEC] or [SNTP] is indicated, the

following adjustment is invalid.

ENTER

• Enter a numerical value within the specified range for each item and press the

key.

END

• Press the

key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to

the previous screen.

END

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and

is pressed, "Error: Incorrect date" is

displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Adjust again.

⎯ 94 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Setting (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Setting

(change)" except for the relay version.

The following items are displayed:

Relay version

Description

Address in the RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850 communication

Recording setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Enter a number on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.

• Press 3 (= Setting (view)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (view)" screen.

)

/1 S et t in g ( vi e w

1 = Ve r si on

4 = Re c or d

2 = Des c r ipt ion

5 = Sta t u s

3 = C om m.

6 = Pro t e cti on

9= LE D

7 = Bi n ar y i npu t

8 = Bin a r y o ut p u t

• Press 1 (= Version) on the "Setting (view)" screen and the "Relay version" screen appears.

3/ 8

* *** * * **** ****** ** ****

/2 R el a y vers ion

R el a y t ype

N o. :

S e r i a l

M a i n s o f t w a r e :

I E C 6 1 8 5 0 en g. :

* *** * * **** ****** ** ****

* *** * * **** **(*** ** ***)

* *** * * **** **(*** ***** )

d at a :

PLC

I EC10 3 d at a :

IEC61 85 0 da ta:

G OOSE s ub s c ript: * *** * * **** **(*** ***** )

4.2.5.2 Settings

The "Description", "Comm.", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary input", "Binary output"

and "LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Setting (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Setting (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:

Password

Description

Address in the RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850 communication

⎯ 95 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Recording

Status

Protection

Binary input

Binary output

LED

All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Setting (view)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows.

- To enter a selective number

- To enter numerical values

- To enter a text string

To enter a selected number

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The

cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the

and

keys. If

setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the

and

keys.

/6 S c h e m e swi t ch

1 / ***

PM D

O R

DI FT

1R EF

1=3P

1=1I

2 =1P

2= 2I 0

3=3 I0

3=3I 0

2R EF

3R EF

1=1I

2= 2I 0

1=1I 0

0=Of

2= 2I 0

1= On

RE F_D EF

M1 OCI

M2 OCI

M3 OCI

M1 EFI

M2 EFI

M3 EFI

L/ O

1=Lo n g 2 =Std 3=Ver y 4 =E xt

1=Lo g 2=Std 3=Ver y 4 =E xt

y 4 =E xt

1=Lo g 2 =Std 3=Ver

1=Lo g 2 =Std 3 Ver

0=Of

1= On

2F -LO CK

5F -LO CK

DI F1

0=Of f

0=Of

DI F2

DI F3

0=Of f

M. T4- 1

M. T4- 2

M. T4- 3

SV CNT

CT SEN

0=Of

1= On

0=AL &BL K 1= ALM

0=Of

1= On

• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Enter the selected number. (Numbers other than those displayed cannot be entered.)

ENTER

• Press the

key to confirm the entry and the cursor will move to the next line below.

(On the lowest line, the entered number blinks.)

END

• After completing the setting on the screen, press the

key to return to the upper menu.

⎯ 96 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

To correct the entered number, do the following.

CANCEL

ENTER

• If it is before pressing the

key, press the

key and enter the new number.

ENTER

• If it is after pressing the

key, move the cursor to the correct line by pressing the

and

keys and enter the new number.

Note: If the

key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the

key, all

ENTER

CANCEL

the entries performed so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the

upper one.

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.

The number to the right of "Current No.=" shows the current setting.

/3 C ha n ge a ct i ve gro u p ( A ct i ve gro u p

= * )

1 =G r ou p 1

5= G rou p 5

2= G r ou p 2

6= G r ou p 6

3= G r ou p 3

7= G r ou p 7

4= G r ou p 4

8= G r ou p 8

Cu rr e nt N o. = *

S elec t No . =

• Enter a number to the right of "Select No. = ". (Numbers other than those displayed cannot be

entered.)

ENTER

• Press the

key to confirm the entry and the entered number blinks.

END

• After completing the setting on the screen, press the

key to return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered number, do the following.

CANCEL

key and enter the new number.

ENTER

• If it is before pressing the

key, press the

ENTER

• If it is after pressing the

key, enter the new number.

To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The

cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the

and

keys. If

setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the

and

keys.

/6 V T &

1 /7

C T

r ati o

1C T

2C T

3C T

(

1 - 2 0 00 0 )：

1 - 2 0 000 )：

2 000

1 000

400

1n CT (

2n CT (

3n CT (

1 - 2 0 000 )：

100

400

(

• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Enter the numerical value.

ENTER

• Press the

key to confirm the entry and the cursor will move to the next line below. (If

a numerical value outside the displayed range is entered, "Error: Out of range" appears on the

CANCEL

top line and the cursor remains on the line. Press the

key to clear the entry.)

END

• After completing the setting on the screen, press the

key to return to the upper screen.

⎯ 97 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.

CANCEL

ENTER

• If it is before pressing the

key, press the

key and enter the new

numerical value.

ENTER

• If it is after pressing the

and keys and enter the new numerical value.

Note: If the key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the

key, move the cursor to the correct line by pressing the

key, all

ENTER

CANCEL

the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and the screen returns to the upper

one.

To enter a text string

Text strings are entered in the bracket under the "Plant name" or "Description" screen.

To select a character, use keys 2, 4, 6 and 8 to move the blinking cursor down, left, right and up.

"→" and "←" on each of lines 2 to 4 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of

22 characters can be entered within the brackets.

/3 P la n t na me

[

]

←→

AB CD EF G HI JK LM NO PQ RS T UV WXY Z ( )[ ]@ _

ab cd ef g hi jk lm no pq rs t uv wxyz { }* /+ -< = >

01 23 45 6 78 9 !”#$ %& ’：；，．^`

ENTER

• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the

key.

• Move the blinking cursor to select a character.

ENTER

• Press the

to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.

END

• Press the

key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered character, do either of the following.

ENTER

• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the

key and enter the new

character.

CANCEL

• Discard the whole entry by pressing the

key and restart the entry from the first.

To complete the setting

ENTER

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the

key, the new settings

are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the

following steps.

END

• Press the

key to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen shown

below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Setting

(change)" sub-menu.

/2 * ** * ** ** ** ** **

Ch an ge se tt in gs ?

E NT ER =Y es

C ANC E L= No

ENTER

• When the screen is displayed, press the

key to start operation using the new settings,

CANCEL

or press the

key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back

CANCEL

to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the

key to cancel entries made so far

⎯ 98 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

and to turn to the "Setting (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password

For the sake of security of changing the settings and testing the relay, password protection can be

set as follows;

• Press 4 (= Setting (change)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (change)"

screen.

/1 S et t in g ( ch a ng e )

1 = Pa s sw or d 2 = Des c r ipt ion

4 = Re c or d 5 = Sta t u s

7 = Bi n ar y i npu t

3 = RS M c omm

6 = Pro t e cti on

9= LE D

8 = Bin a r y o ut p u t

• Press 1 (= Password) to display the "Password" screen.

/2 P as s wo rd

I n pu t ne w pa ss w or d

Re t yp e ne w pa ss w or d

[

]

ENTER

• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input new password" and press the

key.

• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype new password"

ENTER

and press the

key.

• Press the

key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

END

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen

before returning to the upper screen.

"Mismatch-password unchanged."

Re-entry is then requested.

• Press 2 (= Test) on the "Password" screen to set the password for the test.

/ 2 T e s t

I np ut n e w p a s sw or d

R e ty pe n e w p a ss w or d

[

]

Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change

and the test screens.

If 4 (= Setting (change)) is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen

"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the

"Setting (change)" sub-menu screens.

P as sw o rd

In pu t pa ss w or d

[

]

⎯ 99 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The

"Setting (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the

same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

CANCEL

RESET

together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The screen

Press

and

disappears, and the password protection of the GRT100 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.6.3 Description

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.

• Press 4 (= Setting (change)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (change)"

screen.

• Press 2 (= Description) to display the "Description" screen.

/2 D es c ri pt ion

=D e

s c r i pt

1 =P l an t n

• To enter the plant name, select 1 (= Plant name) on the "Description" screen.

/3 P la n t na me

[

]

←→

AB CD EF G HI JK LM NO PQ RS T UV WXY Z ( )[ ]@

←→

ab cd ef g hi jk lm no pq rs t uv wxyz { }* /+ -< = >

”

01 23 45 6 78 9 ! #$ %& ：；，．^`

’

To enter special items, select 2 (= Description) on the "Description" screen.

/3 D es c r pt io n [

]

←→

AB CD EF G HI JK LM NO PQ RS T UV WXY Z ( )[ ]@

←→

ab cd ef g hi jk lm no pq rs t uv wxyz { }* /+ -< = >

”

’

01 23 45 6 78 9 ! #$ %& ：；，．^`

• Enter the text string.

4.2.6.4 Communication

If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system), IEC60870-5-103 or

Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:

• Press 4 (= Setting (change)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (change)"

screen.

• Press 3 (= Comm.) to display the "Communication" screen.

/2 Co mm unica t i on

1 =A d dre ss

2 =S w itc h

e r

/P ar amet

• Press 1 (= Address/Parameter) to enter the relay address number.

⎯ 100 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/ 3 Add re ss/P a r a m e te r

1 / **

H DL C (

I EC

1 -

32 ) :

2 54 ) :

(

- 99 99 -

99 9 9 ) :

S Y A D J (

2 54 ) :

I P1 -1 (

I P1 -2 (

I P1 -3 (

I P1 -4 (

S M1 -1 (

S M1 -2 (

S M1 -3 (

S M1 -4 (

G W1 -1 (

G W1 -2 (

G W1 -3 (

G W1 -4 (

S I1 -1 (

S I1 -2 (

S I1 -3 (

S I1 -4 (

For channel 1(port 1)

For SNTP server 1

2 54 ) :

1 ) :

S I4 -1 (

S I4 - 2(

S I4 -3 (

S I4 -4 (

S MO DE (

G OI NT(

P G1 -1 (

P G1 - 2(

P G1 -3 (

P G1 - 4(

For SNTP server 4

1 -

6 0 ) :

2 54 ) :

For channel 1(port 1)

•

Enter the address number on "HDLC" column for RSM and/or "IEC" column for

IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation value on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time

synchronization of protocol used (−: lags the time, +: leads the time).

Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for

GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI4-4. Four SNTP servers are

available.

Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP

server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain

synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and

synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".

Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE

message receive checked.

Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG1-4 if Ping response checked.

IP address: ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗

IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4

SM1-1 to SM1-4, GW1-1 to GW1-4, SI1-1 to SI4-4, PG1-1 to PG1-4: same as above.

ENTER

• Press the

key.

CAUTION: Do not overlap the number in a network.

•

Press 2 (= Switch) on the "Communication" screen to select the protocol, transmission speed

⎯ 101 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

(baud rate) and test mode setting, etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850.

/3 Swi t ch

1/ *

L C

P R T C

23 2C

1 = H D

1=9.

2 =IEC 03

2= 19. 2 3=38. 4 4 =57. 6 4

IE CBR

1=9.

2= 19. 2

IE CBL K

85 0BL K

85 0AU T

TS TMO D

GS ECH K

PI NGC HK

1=No mal 2=B locked

0=Of f 1= On

0=Of

1 = On

1= On

ENTER

• Select the number corresponding to the system and press the

key.

PRTCL1 is used to select the protocol for channel 1 (COM1 or OP1) of the serial communication

port RS485 or FO (fibre optic).

•

When the remote RSM system applied, select 1 (=HDLC). When the IEC60870-5-103

applied, select 2 (=IEC103).

<232C>

This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.

Note: The default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to

serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.

<IECBR>

This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.

Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.

<850BLK>

Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC61850 communication.

<850AUT>

In the IEC61850 communication, GRT100 provides the access restriction which permits a client

to access only if an authentication parameter matches with a valid parameter (password).

Password is 4-digit number and shared with RSM100.

Select 1 (=On) to use the authentication function.

Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in the IEC61850 communication.

This function is to alarm if any one of GOOSE messages written in GOOSE subscribe file cannot

be received.

Select 1 (=On) to execute GOOSE receive check in the IEC61850 communication.

⎯ 102 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

This function is to check the health of network by regularly sending Ping to IP address which is set

on PG∗-∗.

Select 1 (=On) to execute Ping response check.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:

• Press 4 (= Setting (change)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (change)"

screen.

• Press 4 (= Record) to display the "Record" screen.

Rec o rd

/ 2

1 = Fau l t r e c o r d

2 =E ven t re cord

3 = D i s t u r b a n c e re cor d

Setting the fault recording

• Press 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.

/ 3 F

r ec or d

1 = O

1 / 1

1 _

au l

a t in g 2 = F au lt

ha s e m o de

pe r

ENTER

• Enter 1 or 2 and press the

key.

Enter 1 (= Operating) to display the operating phase.

Enter 2 (= Fault) to display the fault phase.

Setting the event recording

• Press 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.

/ 3 E v e n t r e c o r d

1 / 1 2 9

B I T R N (

0 -

1 2 8 ) :

3 0 7 1 ) :

1 2 8 _

E V 1

E V 2

(

E V 3

E V 4

E V 5

E V 6

E V 7

E V 8

E V 9

(

0 -

3 0 7 1 ) :

3 0 7 1

E V 1 0 (

E V 1 2 8 (

0 -

3 0 7 1 ) :

3 0 7 1

⎯ 103 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

<BITRN>

•

Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If enter 20, both

status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is

recorded for EV21 to EV128 events.

<EV∗>

Enter the signal number to record as the event in Appendix B. It is recommended that this

•

setting can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD

screen. (Refer to Section 3.4.2.)

Setting the disturbance recording

• Press 3 (= Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.

a ce

/3 D i s t u r b n

re co rd

1= Re cor d

t i me & sta r te r

2 = Sc he me s wi tc h

3 =Bi nar y s igna l

• Press 1 (= Record time & starter) to display the "Record time & starter" screen.

/ ４ R e c o r d t i m e & s t a r t e r

1 / 5

T i m e (

0 . 1 -

3 . 0 ) :

2 0 . 0 0 ) :

1 . 0 _

1 . 0 0

1 O C P S ( 0 . 1 0 -

2 O C P S ( 0 . 1 0 -

p u

1 . 0 0

1 O C P G ( 0 . 0 5 -

2 O C P G ( 0 . 1 0 -

2 0 . 0 0 ) :

1 . 0 0

p u

• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set starters, do the following:

• Press 2 (= Scheme switch) on the "Disturbance record" screen to display the "Scheme switch"

screen.

/4 Scheme swit ch

TRI P1 0=Off 1=On

1/ 14

TRI P

0=Off 1=On

TRI P3

EVE N T 3 0=Off 1=On

• Enter 1 to use as a starter or enter 0 if not to use.

•

Press 3 (= Binary signal) on the "Disturbance record" screen to display the "Binary signal"

screen.

/ ４ B i n a r y s i g n a l

1 / 3 2

S I G 1 (

S I G 2 (

S I G 3 (

S I G 4 (

0 -

3 0 7 1 ) :

1 _

S I G 3 2 (

0 -

3 0 7 1 ) :

• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B. It is recommended that this

⎯ 104 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

setting can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD

screen. (Refer to Section 3.4.3.)

4.2.6.6 Status

To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following.

Press 5 (= Status) on the "Setting (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.

/ 2 S t a t u s

1 = M e t e r i n g

2 = T i m e s y n c h r o n i z a t i o n

3 = T i m e z o n e

Setting the metering

• Press 1 (= Metering) to display the "Metering" screen.

/3 Met e ri ng

1/ 1

Di spla y v alue 1 =P rima ry 2=S e co ndary 1 _

ENTER

• Enter the selected number and press the

key. Repeat this for all items.

Setting the time synchronization

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with external IRIG-B time standard signal,

RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103(IEC) or SNTP. This is selected by setting as follows:

• Press 2 (= Time synchronization) to display the "Time synchronization" screen.

/ 3 T i m e s y n c h r o n i z a t i o n

0 = O f f 1 = I R I G 2 = R S M 3 = I E C 4 = S N T P

C u r r e n t N o . = 0

S e l e c t N o . = _

ENTER

• Enter the selected number and press the

key.

Note: When to select IRIG-B, RSM, IEC, or SNTP, check that they are active on the "Time

synchronization source" screen in "Status" sub-menu. If it is set to an inactive IRIG-B, RSM,

IEC, or SNTP, the calendar clock runs locally.

Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to transform

GMT to the local time.

• Press 3 (= Time zone) to display the "Time zone" screen.

/ 3 T i m e z o n e

1 / 2

h r s

m i n

G M T

(

- 1 2 -

- 5 9 -

+ 1 2 ) :

+ 5 9 ) :

+ 9 _

+ 0

G M T m (

•

Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter a numerical value to GMT (hrs) and

ENTER

GMTm (min), and press the

key.

⎯ 105 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.2.6.7 Protection

The GRT100 can have 8 setting groups for protection according to the change of power system

operation, one of which is assigned to be active. To set protection, do the following:

• Press 6 (= Protection) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.

/2 P ro t ec ti on

1 = Ch an g e ac ti ve g ro u p

2 = Ch an g e se tt in g

3 = Co py gr ou p

Changing the active group

• Press 1 (= Change active group) to display the "Change active group" screen.

/3 C ha n ge a ct iv e gr o up (Ac t iv e gr ou p = * )

1 = Gr ou p1

5 = Gr ou p5

2 =G ro up2

6 =G ro up6

3 = Gro u p3

7 = Gro u p7

4 = Gr o up4

8 = Gr o up8

Cu rr e nt N o. = *

S el ec t No . =

ENTER

• Enter the selected number and press the

key.

Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product GRT100 was

shipped. For the default values, see Appendix D and H. To change the settings, do the following:

• Press 2 (= Change setting) to display the "Change setting" screen.

/3 C ha n ge s et ti ng

(Ac t iv e gr ou p = * )

1 = Gr ou p1

5 = Gr ou p5

2 =G ro up2

6 =G ro up6

3 = Gro u p3

7 = Gro u p7

4 = Gr o up4

8 = Gr o up8

• Press the group number to change the settings and display the "Protection" screen.

/4 Pro te ct ion

(G roup *)

sfor mer

1= Tran

2 = Trip

para mete r

Settings are required for transformer parameter and protection functions.

Setting the transformer parameters

Enter the VT&CT ratio as follows:

• Press 1 (= Transformer parameter) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Transformer

parameter" screen.

/5 T ra n sfor m er par am eter

1= VT & CT r at io

(G ro u p * )

• Press 1 (VT&CT ratio) to display the "VT&CT ratio" screen.

⎯ 106 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/6 V T &

1 /7

C T

r ati o

1C T

2C T

3C T

(

1 - 2 0 00 0 )：

1 - 2 0 000 )：

2 000

1 000

400

1n CT (

2n CT (

3n CT (

1 - 2 0 000 )：

100

400

(

ENTER

• Enter the VT ratio and press the

• Enter the CT ratio and press the

CAUTION

key.

Do not set the CT primary rated current. Set the CT ratio.

(CT ratio) = (CT primary rated current [A]) / (Relay rated current [A])

END

• Press the

key to return the display to the "Transformer parameter" screen.

Setting the protection function

To set the protection schemes, scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.

Protection elements are measuring elements and timers.

Note: Depending on the selected protection scheme and scheme switch setting, some of the scheme

switches and protection elements are not used and so need not be set. The protection function

setting menu of the GRT100 does not display unnecessary setting items. Therefore, start by

setting the protection scheme, then set the scheme switch, then the protection elements.

As a result of the above, note that some of the setting items described below may not appear in

the actual setting.

• Press 2 (= Trip) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Trip" screen.

/5 Tri p

(G roup *)

Ph as e m atch in g

1 =

2 =

3 =

Sc he m e sw itch

Prot e ct ion el emen t

Setting the phase matching

• Press 1 (= Phase matching) to display the "Phase matching" screen.

• Select 1 (= Alpha) or 2 (= Beta) to set the phase matching method.

/6 P h a s e m a t c h i n g

1 = Al pha

2 =B eta

Cu rr e nt N o. = 2

S el ec t No. =

Note: If the "Alpha" is selected, the phase matching method corresponds to that of GRT100-xxxC

model. If the "Beta", it corresponds to that of GRT100-xxxA and -xxxB models.

END

• Press the

key to return the display to the "Trip" screen.

Setting the scheme switch

• Press 2 (= Scheme switch) to display the "Scheme switch" screen.

⎯ 107 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/6 Sch e me swi t ch

1/ ***

PM D

O R

DI FT

1R EF

2R EF

1=3P

1=1I

2 =1P

2= 2I 0

3=3 I0

3=3I 0

2= 2I 0

3R EF

1=1I 0

0=Of

2= 2I 0

1= On

RE F_D EF

M1 OCI

M2 OCI

M3 OCI

M1 EFI

M2 EFI

M3 EFI

L/ O

1=Lo n g 2 =Std 3=Ver y 4 =E xt

1=Lo g 2=Std 3=Ver y 4 =E xt

y 4 =E xt

1=Lo g 2 =Std 3=Ver

1=Lo g 2 =Std 3 Ver

0=Of

1= On

2F -LO CK

5F -LO CK

DI F1

0=Of f

0=Of

DI F2

DI F3

0=Of f

M. T4- 1

M. T4- 2

M. T4- 3

SV CNT

CT SEN

0=Of

1= On

0=AL M &BL K 1= ALM

0=Of 1= On

Note: The menu of DIFTPMD depends on the phase matching. The above screen is α-method

(Alpha). In the case of β-method (Beta), DIFTPMD is 1=3POR, 2=2PAND, 3=1P. Refer to

Section 2.2.1.

If the "On" is selected in the menu of REF_DEF, the REF characteristic corresponds to that of

GRT100-xxxC model. If the "Off", it corresponds to that of GRT100-xxxA and -xxxB models.

ENTER

• Enter the number corresponding to the switch status to be set and press the

key for

each switch.

The setting of REF depends on the type of the transformer. The setting method is shown in

Appendix L.

• After setting all switches, press the

key to return to the "Trip" screen.

END

Setting the protection elements

• Press 3 (= Protection element) on the "Trip" screen to display the "Protection element" screen.

/6 P ro t ec ti on e le men t

(Gr ou p = * )

3 = OC

6 = FRQ

1 = DI FT

4 = TH R

2 =R EF

5 =V /F

<DIFT>

• Press 1 (= DIFT) to display the "DIFT" screen. The measuring elements used in the current

differential protection are set using this screen.

ENTER

• Enter the numerical value and press the

key for each element.

END

• After setting all elements, press the

key to return to the "Protection element" menu.

⎯ 108 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/7 D IFT

1/ 15

(

0. 10 -

10 -

1 . 0 0 ) :

0 . 10

1 0

1 0 0

2 0 0

) :

1 00

10 -

(

1. 00 - 2

1 . 00

0 . 0 0 ) :

5 0 . 0 0 ) :

2 ) :

kc 1 (

0. 05 -

1 -

1 . 0 0

kct

(

1 . 5 0

2 . 0 0

yd _p (

yd _s (

2 ) :

1 -

1 1 ) :

ve c_ (

1 -

) :

yd _t (

1 -

1 1 ) :

ve c_ (

1 -

k2 f

k5 f

(

5 0

1 0 0

10 -

2. 00 -

2 0 . 0 0 ) :

2 . 00

<REF>

• Press 2 (= REF) to display the "REF" screen. The measuring elements and timers used in the

restricted earth fault protection are set using this screen.

ENTER

• Enter the numerical value and press the

key for each element.

END

• After setting all elements, press the

key to return to the "Protection element" menu.

/7 R EF

1/ 21

1ik

(

0. 05 -

1. 00 -

0 . 5 0 ) :

0 . 0 5

1 . 0 0

1k ct 1 (

5 0 . 0 0 ) :

) :

50 . 0 0

. 00

ct 2

ct 3

(

50 . 0 0 ) :

1 0 0 ) :

1 . 00

5 0

00 -

50 -

(

1p 2

1k p

2i k

0. 50

2 . 0 0 ) :

0 . 5 0 ) :

1 . 0 0

0 . 5 0

1 . 0 0

1 . 00

5 0

0. 05 -

1. 00 -

2k ct 1(

2k ct 2(

0 . 0 0 ) :

50 . 0 0 ) :

ct 3

(

) :

10 0

2p 2

2k p

3i k

50 -

0. 50

0. 05

2 . 0 0 ) :

0 . 5 0 ) :

0 . 0 0 ) :

1 . 0 0

0 . 5 0

1 . 0 0

3k ct 1(

3k ct 2(

1. 00 -

1. 00 - 5

) :

50 . 0 0

. 00

5 0

ct 3

(

1. 00

3p 2

3k p

0 0 ) :

50 -

0. 50 -

2 . 0 0 ) :

10 .

1 . 0 0

0 . 0

0 0 ) :

) :

T1 RE F(

RE F

0. 00

0 .

0 0

(

0. 0 -

10 .

0 0 ) :

T3 RE F(

0. 00

<OC>

• Press 3 (OC) to display the "OC" screen. The overcurrent elements and timers are set using this

screen.

⎯ 109 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

ENTER

• Enter the numerical value and press the

key for each element.

END

• After setting all elements, press the

key to return to the "Protection element" menu.

1 / 2 4

/7 O C

1 O C

2 O C

3 O C

(

0 . 1 0 - 2 0 . 0 0 ) :

0 . 1 0

p u

T 1 O C

T 2 O C

T 3 O C

1 O C I

2 O C I

3 O C I

(

0 . 0 0 - 1 0 . 0 0 ) :

0 . 0 0

0 . 1 0

0 . 5 0

0 . 1 0

0 . 0 0

0 . 1 0

0 . 5 0

0 . 1 0 -

0 . 0 5 -

5 . 0 0 ) :

1 . 0 0 ) :

p u

T 1 O C I (

T 2 O C I (

T 3 O C I (

1 E F

2 E F

(

0 . 1 0 - 2 0 . 0 0 ) :

0 . 0 0 - 1 0 . 0 0 ) :

p u

3 E F

T 1 E F

T 2 E F

T 3 E F

1 E F I

2 E F I

3 E F I

0 . 1 0 -

0 . 0 5 -

5 . 0 0 ) :

1 . 0 0 ) :

p u

T 1 E F I (

T 2 E F I (

T 3 E F I (

<THR>

• Press 4 (= THR) to display the "THR" screen. The measuring elements and the timer used in

the thermal overload protection are set using this screen.

ENTER

• Enter the numerical value and press the

key for each element.

END

• After setting all elements, press the

key to return to the "Protection element" menu.

/7 T HR

1/ 5

(

0 . 5 - 5

m in

0 0 . 0 ) :

4 . 0 0 ) :

2 . 5 0 ) :

0 . 5

0 . 10

0 . 50

0 .

10 -

0 . 50 -

(

0. 00 -

0 -

1 . 0 0 ) :

1 0 ) :

. 50

min

<V/F>

• Press 5 (= V/F) to display the “V/F” screen. The measuring elements and timers used in the

overexcitation protection are set using this screen.

ENTER

• Enter the numerical value and press the

key for each element.

END

• After setting all elements, press the

key to return to the “Protection element” menu.

⎯ 110 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/7 V /F

1 /

( 10 0 . 0 - 12 .

0 0 ) :

1 . 3 0 ) :

1 0

0 . 0

(

1 . 10

1 . 20

1 .

1 . 05 -

(

1. 10 -

1 -

1 . 4 0 ) :

6 0 0 ) :

3 6 0 0 ) :

6 0 0 ) :

1 . 30

L T

H T

R T

T V F H (

T V F A (

60 -

1 -

<FRQ>

• Press 6 (= FRQ) to display the “FRQ” screen. The measuring elements and timers used in the

frequency protection are set using this screen.

ENTER

• Enter the numerical value and press the

key for each element.

END

• After setting all elements, press the

key to return to the “Protection element” menu.

/7 F R Q

1/ 6

81 -1 ( 45 . 00 - 55 . 0 0 ):

81 -2 ( 55 . 0 0 ) :

) :

4 5 . 00

45 .

1 0 0

(

40 -

( 0. 00 - 6

F R Q L

F R Q H

0 . 0 0 ) :

. 00

T F R Q A ( 0. 00 - 6

Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:

• Press 3 (= Copy group) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy group A to B" screen.

/3 C op y gr ou p A t o B

(Ac t iv e gr ou p = * )

(

1 -

8 ) ：

• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.

• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.

Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the conditions described in Table 3.2.2.

• Press 7 (= Binary input) on the "Setting (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary input"

screen.

⎯ 111 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/2 B in ary i np ut

B ISW 1

1 = No rm

2 =I nv

1 /15

B ISW 2

B ISW 3

B IS W 4

B IS W 5

B I S W 14

B I S W 15

B I S W 16

ENTER

• Enter 1 (= Normal) or 2 (= Inverted) and press the

key for each binary input.

4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRT100 except the tripping command, and the relay failure signal are

user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to six ANDing or ORing signals to one

output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix B.

It is also possible to attach a drop-off delay time of 0.2 seconds to these signals. The drop-off delay

time is disabled by the scheme switch [BOTD].

Appendix D shows the factory default settings.

To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output module

• Press 8 (= Binary output) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Binary output"

screen. The available output module(s) will be shown.

/2 B ina ry out pu t

1 = IO# 2

2 = IO# 3

• Press the number corresponding to the selected output module to display the "Binary output"

screen.

/3 B inar y ou tput

Se lect BO

(IO2)

(

1 - 1 3)

S ele c t No . =

Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not to be used,

enter 0 for the logic gates #1 to #6 when assign signals.

Selecting the output relay

ENTER

• Enter the output relay number and press the

key to display the "Setting" screen.

/4 S et t in g

(BO1

I O2 )

1= Lo gi c g at e ty pe & de lay ti me r

2 = In pu t t o lo gi c ga t e

⎯ 112 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting the logic gate type and timer

• Press 1 to display the "Logic gate type and delay timer" screen.

/5 L og i c ga te t yp e & d ela y t im er

1 / 2

Lo gi c

BO TD

1 =O R

2 = AN D

1 = On

0 =O ff

ENTER

• Enter 1 or 2 to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the

key.

ENTER

• Enter 0 or 1 to add 0.2s drop-off delay time to the output relay or not and press the

key.

END

• Press the

key to return to the "Setting" screen.

Assigning signals

• Press 2 on the "Setting" screen to display the "Input to logic gate" screen.

/5 I np u t to l og ic g a te

1 / 6

In #1 (

In #2 (

In #3 (

0 -

307 1 ) :

In #4 (

In #5 (

In #6 (

0 -

07 1 :

)

307 1 ) :

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal

referring to Appendix B.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.10 LEDs

Four LEDs of the GRT100 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be

programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset

characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. The signals listed in

Appendix B can be assigned to each LED as follows.

Selection of LED

•

Press 9 (= LED) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.

/2 L ED

Se le ct LE D

(

1 -

S ele c t No . =

• Enter the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "Setting" screen.

/3 S et t in g

(LED 1 )

1= Lo gi c g at e ty pe & re set

2 = In pu t t o lo gi c ga t e

⎯ 113 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Setting the logic gate type and reset

• Press 1 to display the "Logic gate type and reset" screen.

/4 L ogi c g at e ty p e & r e se t

1 / 2

L o g i c

R e s e t

1 = O R

2 = A N D

0 = I n s t 1 = La t c h

• Enter 1 or 2 to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0 or 1 to select “Instantaneous reset” or “Latch reset” and press the ENTER key.

END

• Press the

key to return to the "Setting" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.

Assigning signals

• Press 2 on the "Setting" screen to display the "Input to logic gate" screen.

/4 I np u t to l og ic g a te

1 / 4

In #1 (

In #2 (

In #3 (

0 -

307 1 ) ：

2 1

6 7

In #4 (

0 -

307 1 ) ：

•

Assign signals to gates (In #1- #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal

referring to Appendix B.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1-#4, enter 0 to the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for other LEDs to be configured.

4.2.7 Testing

The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as setting of testing switches, forced operation of

binary outputs, time measurement of the variable setting timer and logic signal observation.

The password must be entered in order to enter the test screens because the "Test" menu has

password security protection. (See Section 4.2.6.2.)

4.2.7.1 Setting the switches

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".

Disabling the A.M.F. prevents tripping from being blocked even in the event of a failure in the

items being monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the

"ALARM" LED and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded,

either.

Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.

Note: Set the switch [A.M.F] to "Off" before applying the test inputs, when the A.M.F is disabled.

The switch [Reset] is used to test the THR and V/F elements. When the switch [Reset] is set to "1",

the time counting of inverse time characteristic can be forcibly reset.

While the switch [A.M.F] is set to "0" or [Reset] is set to "1", the red "TESTING" LED is lit for

⎯ 114 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

alarm purposes.

Caution: Be sure to restore these switches after the tests are completed.

Disabling automatic monitoring

• Press 5 (= Test) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

/1 Tes t

Bina r y outp ut

Logi c c ircu it

1= Swit ch

3= T imer

2 =

4 =

• Press 1 (= Switch) to display the "Switch" screen.

/2 S wi t ch

1 / 3

A. M. F.

Rese t

IE CTST

0 =O ff

0 =Off

1 = On

1 =On

ENTER

• Enter 0 for A.M.F to disable the A.M.F. and press the

• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103

ENTER

key.

communication when testing the local relay, and press the

END

key.

• Press the

key to return to the "Test" screen.

Resetting the time counting of THR and V/F elements

ENTER

• Enter 1 for Reset to reset the time counting forcibly and press the

key.

END

• Press the

key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external

devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time for each

module.

• Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y o u t p u t

1 = I O # 1

2 = I O # 2

3 = I O # 3

The LCD displays the output modules mounted depending on the model.

• Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. Then the LCD

displays the name of the module, the name of the output relay, the name of the terminal block

and the terminal number to which the relay contact is connected.

⎯ 115 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/3 B O

IO# 2

(0 = Di s ab le 1 =E na bl e)

1 /14

B O1

B O2

B O3

IO# 2

B O4

B O5

B O6

B O7

B O8

B O9

B O10

B O11

B O12

F AI L

B O13

ENTER

• Enter 1 and press the

key.

END

• After completing the entries, press the

key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown

below.

/3 B O

Keep pre ss i ng 1 to o per at e .

Pres s C AN CE L to c anc el .

• Keep pressing

key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• Release the press of

key to reset the operation.

4.2.7.3 Timer

The pick-up or drop-off delay time of the variable timer used in the scheme logic can be measured

with monitoring jacks A and B. Monitoring jacks A and B are used to observe the input signal and

output signal to the timer respectively.

• Press 3 (= Timer) on the "Test" screen to display the "Timer" screen.

/2 T i m e r

Time r(

1 / 1

1 -

1 0 0 ) :

ENTER

• Enter the number corresponding to the timer to be observed and press the

key. The

timers and related numbers are listed in Appendix C.

END

• Press the

key to display the following screen.

/2 T im e r

Pr es s E NT ER t o op er a te .

Pr es s C AN CE L to c an c el .

ENTER

• Press the

key to operate the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns on, and timer is

⎯ 116 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

initiated and the following display appears. The input and output signals of the timer can be

observed at monitoring jacks A and B respectively. The LEDs above monitoring jacks A or B

are also lit if the input or output signal exists.

/2 T im e r

Op er at i ng .. .

Pr es s E ND t o re se t.

Pr es s C AN CE L to c an c el .

END

• Press the

key to reset the input signal to the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns off.

CANCEL

• Press the

key to test other timers. Repeat the above testing.

4.2.7.4 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix B with monitoring

jacks A and B.

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

/2 Log i c circ ui t

1 / 2

T e r m A (

Te rm B(

0 -

30 7 1 ) :

071 ) :

4 8

ENTER

• Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the

key.

ENTER

• Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the

key.

After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring

jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.

On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.

⎯ 117 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS-232C port on the front panel.

On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault voltage and current are

available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.

• Display of voltage and current waveform:

• Symmetrical component analysis:

• Harmonic analysis:

Oscillograph, vector display

On arbitrary time span

• Frequency analysis:

For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 Communication Interface

The relay can be provided with the following communication interfaces:

- RSM100 (Relay Setting and Monitoring)

- IEC 60870-5-103

- IEC 61850

4.4.1 RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring System)

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data

on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual

relays via a telecommunication network using a remote PC.

For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

Figure 4.4.1.1 shows the typical configuration of the RSM system via a protocol converter

G1PR2. The relays are connected through twisted pair cables, and the maximum 256 relays can be

connected since the G1PR2 can provide up to 8 ports. The total length of twisted pair wires should

not exceed 1200 m. Relays are mutually connected using an RS485 port on the relay rear panel and

connected to a PC RS232C port via G1PR2. Terminal resistor (150 ohms) is connected the last

relay. The transmission rate used is 64 kbits/s.

Figure 4.4.1.2 shows the configuration of the RSM system with Ethernet LAN (option). The relays

are connected to HUB through UTP cable using RJ-45 connector at the rear of the relay. The relay

recognizes the transmission speed automatically.

In case of the optional fiber optic interface (option), the relays are connected through graded-index

multi-mode 50/125μm or 62.5/125μm type optical fiber using ST connector at the rear of the

relay.

⎯ 118 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Twisted paired

cable

G1PR2

Figure 4.4.1.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System (1)

UTP cable

(10Base-T or

100Base TX)

214B-13-10

100/110/115/120V

Other

relays

HUB.

Relay

Figure 4.4.1.2 Relay Setting and Monitoring System (2)

4.4.2 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The relay can support the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used

when the relay communicates with substation automation system and is used to transfer the

following measurand, status data and general command from the relay to the control system.

• Measurand data:

• Status data:

current, voltage, frequency

events, fault indications, etc.

The IEC60870-5-103 function in the relay can be customized with the original software “IEC103

configurator”. It runs on a personal computer (PC) connected to the relay, and can help setting of

Time-tagged messages, General command, Metering, etc. For details of the setting method, refer

to “IEC103 configurator” manual. For the default setting of IEC60870-5-103, see Appendix N.

The protocol can be used through the RS485 port on the relay rear panel and can be also used

through the optional fibre optical interface.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps.

The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.

For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.4.

⎯ 119 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.4.3 IEC 61850 interface

The relay can also communicate with substation automation system via Ethernet communication

networks using IEC 61850 protocols.

Figure 4.4.3.1 Substation Automation System using Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol

4.5 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

• Event records

• Disturbance records

• Fault records

• Metering

• Automatic supervision

• Display of the system quantities on the digest screen

• Display of the fault records on the digest screen

• Display of the automatic monitoring results on the digest screen

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with the external IRIG-B time standard

signal, RSM or IEC clock. This can be selected by setting.

If it is necessary to synchronize with the IRIG-B time standard signal, it is possible to transform

GMT to the local time by setting.

When the relays are connected to the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1.1, the calendar clock

of each relay is synchronized with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronized with the

external time standard (GPS clock etc.), then all the relay clocks are synchronized with the

external time standard.

⎯ 120 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

5. Installation

5.1 Receipt of Relays

When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check

for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.

Check that the following accessories are attached.

• 3 pins for the monitoring jack, packed in a plastic bag.

• An optional attachment kit required in rack-mounting. (See Appendix F.)

1 large bracket with 5 round head screws, spring washers and washers (M4×10)

1 small bracket with 3 countersunk head screws (M4×6)

2 bars with 4 countersunk head screws (M3×8)

Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay Mounting

Either a rack or flush mounting relay is delivered as designated by the customer. The GRT100

models are housed into type A case. Appendix F shows the case outline.

If the customer requires a rack-mounting relay, support metal fittings necessary to mount it in the

19-inch rack are also supplied with the relay.

When mounting the relay in the rack, detach the original brackets fixed on both sides of the relay

and seals on the top and bottom of the relay. Attach the larger bracket and smaller bracket on the

left and right side of the relay respectively and the two bars on the top and bottom of the relay.

How to mount the attachment kit, see Appendix F.

Dimension of the attachment kit EP-101 is also shown in Appendix F.

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION

Do not take out any modules outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules

are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of

the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.

Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.

5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potential of several thousand volts.

Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can

cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the

circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.

Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.

Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.

However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, precautions should be taken to preserve

the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.

⎯ 121 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

CAUTION

• Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the

equipment by touching the case.

• Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid

touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.

• Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same

electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

• Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same

potential as yourself.

• Do not place modules in polystyrene trays.

It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried

out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the IEC 60747.

5.5 External Connections

External connections are shown in Appendix G.

Note: In wire connections of terminal block for type A case, the following connections are

recommended because a communication port is located between terminal blocks.

Top View

Relay

Terminal

block

Wire

Communication port

(LAN port)

Figure 5.5.1

Example of Wire Connection

⎯ 122 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

The GRT100 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and

conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.

In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid

personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.

Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits

function when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces

Binary input circuits and output circuits

AC input circuits

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the

protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.

Measuring elements

Timers

Metering and recording

Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external

equipment.

The following tests are included in these tests:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check

Tripping circuit test

⎯ 123 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.2 Cautions

6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION

• The relay rack is provided with a grounding terminal.

Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is grounded.

• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach

the cover provided on top of it.

• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

6.2.2 Cautions on Tests

CAUTION

• While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the printed

circuit board (PCB).

• While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.

• Before turning on the power, check the following:

-Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.

-Make sure the CT circuit is not open.

-Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.

• Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.

• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed

wristband.

⎯ 124 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.3 Preparations

Test equipment

The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source

2 Single-phase current sources

1 Variable-frequency source

1 Combined fundamental and 2nd-harmonic adjustable current supply

1 Combined fundamental and 5th-harmonic adjustable current supply

1 DC power supply

1 DC voltmeter

1 AC voltmeter

1 Phase angle meter

2 AC ammeters

1 Frequency meter

1 Time counter, precision timer

1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the

default settings.

For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List

Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet

Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the

internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings

Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s

specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings, and

auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.

Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS-232C port on the front of the relay.

RSM100 software is required to run the PC.

For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

⎯ 125 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but DC power supply and AC voltage and

current source are required.

6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD display

• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.

Note: If there is a failure, the LCD displays the "Auto-supervision" screen when the DC voltage is

applied.

RESET

• Press the

key for 1 second and check that black dots appear on the whole screen.

LED display

• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.

RESET

• Press the

key for 1 second and check that seven LEDs under the "IN SERVICE"

LED and two LEDs for monitoring jacks A and B are lit in red.

VIEW and RESET keys

• Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Metering" screen is displayed

on the LCD.

RESET

• Press the

key and check that the LCD turns off.

Keypad

• Press any key on the keypad when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the

END

"MENU" screen. Press the

key to turn off the LCD.

• Repeat this for all keys.

⎯ 126 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.

GRT100

-B4

TB4

-A4

-B4

-A4

BI1

BI2

-B5

-A5

BI2

-B10

-A10

-B11

BI12

BI13

TB3

-A14

-B14

TB3

-A14

-B14

-A15

BI14

BI15

BI14

BI15

-A15

-B15

BI16

-B15

TB4

−

-A16

-A17

-A16

-A17

power

supply

power

supply

(a) For Model 203, 204

(a) For Model 101,102, 201, 202

Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit

• Display the "Binary input & output" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/2 B in a ry i np ut & o u tp ut

3/ 5

In pu t ( IO #1)

[0 0 0 0 00 00 0 000

]

In pu t ( IO #2 )

[0 0 0

[0 00

)

Ou tp ut ( IO# 1 -t ri p

Ou tp ut ( IO# 2 )

Ou tp ut ( IO# 3 )

[0 00 00 0 0 00 000 00 ]

[0 00 00 0 0 00 0

]

• Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A4, B4, ..., A6 of terminal block TB4, and A14, B14

and A15 of terminal block TB3.

Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal changes from 0 to 1. (For details

of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)

The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.

⎯ 127 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers

and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output

contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.

• Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen. The LCD

displays the output modules mounted, depending on the model.

/2 B ina ry out pu t

1 = IO# 2

2 = IO# 3

• Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. Then the LCD

displays the name of the module, the name of the output relay, the name of the terminal block

and the terminal number to which the relay contact is connected.

/3 B O

IO# 2

(0 = Di s ab le 1 =E na bl e)

1 /14

B O1

B O2

B O3

IO# 2

B O4

B O5

B O6

B O7

B O8

B O9

B O10

B O11

B O12

F AI L

B O13

ENTER

• Enter 1 and press the

key.

END

• After completing the entries, press the

key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown

below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be

performed collectively.

/3 B O

K e ep

p r ess ing 1 t o op er a t .

to ca nce l

P r es s

C AN CE L

• Keep pressing the

key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

• Release pressing the

key to reset the operation.

⎯ 128 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

This test can be performed by applying the checking voltages and currents to the AC input circuits

and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The testing circuit for Model 100 series is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase voltage source

and two single-phase current sources are required. (Test Model 200 series by same testing method

of Model 100 series.)

GRT100 – 100 series

TB1

-27

-28

Single-phase

voltage

source

TB1

-1

-2

-3

Single-phase

current

source

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

TB4

-A16

-A17

−

power

supply

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit (Model 100s)

• Check that the metering data is set to be expressed as secondary values (Display value = 2) on

the "Metering" screen.

"Setting (view)" sub-menu → "Status" setting screen → "Metering" screen

If the setting is Primary (Display value = 1), change the setting in the "Setting (change)"

sub-menu. Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.

• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen

• Apply the rated AC voltages and currents and check that the displayed values are within ± 5%

of the input values.

⎯ 129 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5 Function Test

6.5.1 Measuring Element

Measuring element characteristics are realized by the software, so it is possible to verify the

overall characteristics by checking representative points.

Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A

or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to

each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.

/2 L og i c ci rc ui t

1 / 2

Te rm A(

Te rm B(

0 -

307 1 ) :

When a signal number is entered for the TermA line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A

and when entered for the TermB line, observed at monitoring jack B.

Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +15V ±3V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V

for logic level "0".

CAUTION

• Use the testing equipment with more than 1kΩ of internal impedance when observing the

output signal at the monitoring jacks.

• Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.

In case of a three-phase element, it is enough to test for a representative phase. A-phase element is

selected hereafter.

6.5.1.1 Current differential element DIF

The current differential element is checked on the following items

• Operating current value

• Percentage restraining characteristic

• Operating time

Note: Set all the CT ratio matching settings (kct1 to kct3) to “1” and phase angle matching settings

(d1 to d3) to “0” in the testing described in 6.5.1.1 to 6.5.1.4, because the operating value

depends on the settings.

Operating current value

Minimum operating current value is checked by simulating a one-end infeed. Figure 6.5.1 shows a

testing circuit simulating an infeed from a primary winding.

⎯ 130 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GRT100

TB1

Single-phase

current

-1

-2

source

−

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test Circuit (Model 100s, 200s)

The output signal numbers of the DIF elements are as follows:

Element

DIF-A

Signal number

DIF-B

DIF-C

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number 44 to observe the DIF-A operation at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply a test current to A-phase current terminals and change the magnitude of the current

applied and measure the value at which the element DIF-A operates.

Check that the measured value is within 7% of the theoretical operating value.

Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (ik setting)

Percentage restraining characteristics

The percentage restraining characteristic is tested on the outflow current (I_out) and infeed current

(I_in) plane as shown in Figure 6.5.2. The characteristic shown in Figure 6.5.2 is equivalent to the

one on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane shown in Figure 2.11.1.

⎯ 131 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

out

DF2

DF1

2+p1

2−p1

kp +

Figure 6.5.2 Current Differential Element (Iout - Iin Plane)

Figure 6.5.3 shows a testing circuit simulating an infeed from a primary winding and outflow from

a secondary winding.

GRT100

Infeed current (I_in)

TB1

Single-phase

current

-1

-2

I_in

source

−

Outflow current

(I_out

)

Monitoring

jack

-9

Single-phase

current

I_out

source

−

-10

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.3 Percentage Restraining Characteristic Test of DIF (Model 100s, 200s)

⎯ 132 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number 44 to observe the DIF-A output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply an infeed current to terminal TB1-1 and -2.

When the infeed current applied is larger than the setting of ik (pu) and smaller than

kp(2+p₁)/2 + ik(2-p₁)/4 (pu), characteristic DF1 is checked.

When the infeed current applied is larger than kp(2+ p₁)/2 + ik(2- p₁)/4 (pu), characteristic

DF2 is checked.

Note: When the default settings are applied, the critical infeed current which

determines DF1 checking or DF2 checking is 1.56×(CT secondary rated

current).

• Apply an outflow current of the same magnitude and counterphase with the infeed current

to terminal TB1-9 and 10.

• Decrease the out flow current in magnitude and measure the values at which the element

operates.

• Check that the measured values are within 7% of the theoretical values.

For characteristic DF1, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation:

I_out= (2−p₁)(I_in−ik)/(2+p₁) (pu)

where, p₁= slope setting of DF1

ik = minimum operating current setting

When the default settings are applied, I_out= [(I_in−0.3) / 3]× (CT secondary rated current).

For characteristic DF2, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation.

I_out= [(2−p₂)I_in−(2−p₁)ik + 2(p₂− p₁)kp]/(2+ p₂) (pu)

where, p₂= slope setting of DF2

kp = break point of DF1 and DF2

When the default settings are applied, I_out= 0.43× (CT secondary rated current).

Operating time

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.4.

⎯ 133 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GRT100

TB1

-1

-2

Single-phase

current

source

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

Start

Time

counter

Stop

Figure 6.5.4 Operating Time Test (Model 100s, 200s)

• Set a test current to 3 times of DIF operating current (= CT secondary rated current × ik

setting).

• Apply the test current and measure the operating time.

• Check that the operating time is 40 ms or less.

⎯ 134 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.2 2F element

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.5.

GRT100

−

Current

source

TB1

-1

-2

50 or 60Hz

−

Current

source

100 or 120Hz

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.5 Testing 2F Element (Model 100s, 200s)

The output signal number of the 2F element is as follows:

Element

Signal number

122

• Set the second harmonic restraint setting k2f to 15%(= default setting).

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number to observe the 2F output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Set the fundamental frequency current I to 3 times of ik setting. Change the magnitude of

the second harmonic current I and measure the value at which the element operates.

• Calculate the percentage of the second harmonic by I /I when the element operates.

2 1

Check that the percentage is within 7% of the k2f setting.

⎯ 135 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.3 5F element

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.6.

GRT100

−

Current

source

TB1

-1

-2

50 or 60Hz

−

Current

source

Monitoring

jack

250 or 300Hz

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.6 Testing 5F Element (Model 100s, 200s)

The output signal number of the 5F element is as follows:

Element

Signal number

123

• Set the fifth harmonic restraint setting k5f to 30%.(= default setting)

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number to observe the 5F output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Set the fundamental frequency current I to 3 times of ik setting. Change the magnitude of

the fifth harmonic current I and measure the value at which the element operates.

• Calculate the percentage of the fifth harmonic by I /I when the element operates. Check

5 1

that the percentage is within 7% of the k5f setting.

⎯ 136 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC

Operating current value

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.

The output signal numbers of the HOC elements are as follows:

Element

HOC-A

HOC-B

HOC-C

Signal number

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number 41 to observe the HOC-A output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply a test current to A-phase current terminals and change the magnitude of the current

applied and measure the value at which the element operates.

Check that the measured value is within 7% of the following value.

Operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (kh setting)

Operating time

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.4.

• Set a test current to 2 times of HOC operating current (= CT secondary rated current × kh

setting)

• Apply the test current and measure the operating time.

• Check that the operating time is 25 ms or less.

⎯ 137 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.5 Restricted earth fault element REF

The restricted earth fault element is checked on the following items.

• Operating current value

• Percentage restraining characteristic

Note: Set all the CT ratio matching settings (1kct1 - 1kct3 to 3kct1 - 3kct3) to "1", because the

operating value depends on the settings.

Operation current value

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.7.

GRT100

TB1

-7

-8

Single-phase

current

source

−

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.7 Operating Current Value Test of REF_DIF element (Model 100s, 200s)

The test current input terminal number and output signal number of the REF_DIF element is as

follows:

Element

Input terminal

number

Output signal

number

1REF_DIF TB1-7 and –8

2REF_DIF TB1-15 and –16

3REF_DIF TB1-23 and –24

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter the signal number 29 to observe the 1REF_DIF output at monitoring jack A and press

ENTER

the

key.

• Apply a test current to TB1-7 and -8 and change the magnitude of the current applied and

measure the value at which the element operates.

Check that the measured value is within 15% of the theoretical operating value.

Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (1ik setting)

⎯ 138 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Percentage restraining characteristics

The percentage restraining characteristic is tested on the outflow current (l_out) and infeed current

(l_in) plane as shown in Figure 6.5.8. The characteristic shown in Figure 6.5.8 is equivalent to the

one on the differential current (ld) and restraining current (lr) plane shown in Figure 2.11.2.

out

DF2

DF1

Operating zone

[kp p2 + (1- p1)ik]/(p2 – p1)

･

Figure 6.5.8 REF_DIF Element (I

- I Plane)

out in

Figure 6.5.9 shows a testing circuit simulating infeed from a neutral circuit and outflow from a

primary winding.

GRT100

TB1

Single-phase

current

-1

-2

I_in

source

−

Monitoring

jack

-7

-8

Single-phase

current

I_out

source

−

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.9 Testing Restricted Earth Fault Element (Model 100s, 200s)

• Enter a signal number 29 to observe the 1REF_DIF output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

⎯ 139 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

• Apply an infeed current to terminal TB1-1 and -2.

When the infeed current applied is larger than the setting of ik (pu) and smaller than [kp⋅p2 +

(1−p1)ik]/(p2 − p1) (pu), characteristic DF1 is checked.

When the infeed current applied is larger than [kp⋅p2 + (1−p1)ik]/(p2 − p1) (pu), characteristic

DF2 is checked.

Note: When the default settings are applied, the critical infeed current which

determines DF1 checking or DF2 checking is 1.6×(CT secondary rated

current).

• Apply an outflow current of the same magnitude and counterphase with the infeed current, to

terminal TB1-7 and -8.

• Decrease the outflow current in magnitude and measure the values at which the element

operates.

• Check that the measured values are within 15% of the theoretical values.

For characteristic DF1, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation.

I_out= (1−p₁)(I_in−ik) (pu)

where,

p1 = slope setting of DF1 (= 0.1 fixed)

ik = minimum operating current setting

When the default settings are applied, I_out= 0.9× (I_in– 0.5) × (CT secondary rated current). For

characteristic DF2, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation

_out= (1−p₂) I_in+ p₂×kp (pu)

where,

p₂= slope setting of DF2

kp = restraining current section setting of DF2

When the default settings are applied, I_out= 1.0 × (CT secondary rated current).

⎯ 140 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.6 Definite time overcurrent elements OC, EF

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.10.

GRT100

TB1

-1

-2

-7

-8

Single-phase

current

source

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

Figure 6.5.10 Testing OC and EF (Model 100s, 200s)

Element

Signal number

47, 53, 59

1OC, 2OC, 3OC

1EF, 2EF, 3EF

72, 75, 78

The testing procedure is as follows:

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

• Enter a signal number to observe the OC or EF output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value at

which the element operates.

Check that the measured value is within ±5% of the theoretical operating value.

Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (OC or EF setting)

⎯ 141 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.7 Inverse time overcurrent elements OCI, EFI

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.11.

GRT100

TB1

-1

-2

-7

-8

Single-phase

current

source

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

Start

Time

counter

Stop

Figure 6.5.11 Testing OCI and EFI (Model 100s, 200s)

One of the four inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers are as

follows:

Element

Signal number

50, 56, 62

1OCI, 2OCI, 3OCI

1EFI, 2EFI, 3EFI

73, 76, 79

Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the OCI or EFI on the "OC" screen.

"Setting (change)" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Trip" screen → "Protection element"

screen → "OC" screen

The testing procedure is as follows:

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.

• Enter a signal number to observe the OCI or EFI output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should

be between 1.2 × I to 20 × I , where I = (CT secondary rated current) × (OCI or EFI current

setting).

• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section

2.11.4. Check that the measured operating time is within the error mentioned below.

Accuracy: Standard, Very and Long-time inverse: IEC 60255-3 class 5

Extremely inverse: IEC 60255-3 class 7.5

⎯ 142 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.8 Thermal overload element THR

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.12.

GRT100

TB1

Single-phase

current

-1

-2

−

source

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

Start

Time

counter

Stop

Figure 6.5.12 Testing THR (Model 100s, 200s)

The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element

THR-S

THR-A

Signal No.

To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch" screen

on the "Test" menu is used.

• Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".

•

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in Section

6.5.1.

•

Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should

be between 1.2 × I to 10 × I , where I is the current setting.

CAUTION

After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has

become 0 on the "Metering" screen.

•

Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section

2.10.6. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.

⎯ 143 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.9 Frequency element FRQ

The frequency element is checked on the following items

• Operating frequency

• Undervoltage block

Operating frequency test

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.13.

GRT100

TB1

-27

-28

Variable

frequency

source

−

Monitoring

jack

TB4

−

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.13 Testing Frequency Element (Model 100s, 200s)

The output signal numbers of the FRQ elements are as follows:

Element

Signal number

Remarks

81-1

Underfrequency tripping

Overfrequency tripping

Underfrequency alarm

Overfrequency alarm

81-2

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number to observe the FRQ output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency applied and measure the

value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ±0.03Hz of

the setting.

Undervoltage block test

• Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of frequency to operate the element.

• Keep the frequency that the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage

applied from the rated voltage to less than UV setting voltage. And then, check that the

element resets.

⎯ 144 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.1.10 Overexcitation element V/F

The overexcitation element is checked on the following items

• Operating value of definite time tripping and alarm characteristic

• Operating time of inverse time tripping characteristic

The output signal numbers of the V/F elements are as follows:

Element

Signal number

Remarks

V/F

Definite time tripping

Inverse time tripping

Definite time alarm

Operating value test for definite time tripping and alarm

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.14.

GRT100

TB1

-27

-28

Single-phase

voltage

source

−

Monitoring

jack

TB4

-A16

-A17

power

supply

−

voltmeter

Figure 6.5.14 Operating Value Test of V/F (Model 100s, 200s)

• Set V (rated voltage setting) to 100V.

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number 80 or 82 to observe the V/F output at monitoring jack A and press the

ENTER

key.

• Apply a test voltage at rated frequency and increase the magnitude of the voltage applied

and measure the value at which an alarm signal or a trip signal is output.

Check that the measured values are within 2% of (V setting) × (A setting) for an alarm

signal and (V setting) × (H setting) for a trip signal.

⎯ 145 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Operating time characteristic test

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.15.

GRT100

TB1

TB4

Single-phase

voltage

-27

-28

source

-A16

-A17

Monitoring

jack

power

supply

−

Start

Time

counter

Stop

Figure 6.5.15 Operating Time Characteristic Test of V/F (Model 100s, 200s)

The testing procedure is as follows:

• Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"

screen.

• Enter a signal number 81 to observe the inverse time tripping output at monitoring jack A

ENTER

and press the

key.

Note: Set the swich [Reset] to “Off”→ “On”→ “Off” to initialize a time count. See Section 4.2.7.1.

• Apply a test voltage at rated frequency and measure the operating time. The magnitude of

the test voltage should be between (V setting) × (L setting) and (V setting) × (H setting).

• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section

2.11.8 where V is the test voltage. Check that the measured operating time is from +15% to

−10% of the calculated value.

6.5.2 Timer Test

The pick-up delay time of the variable timer can be measured by connecting the monitoring jacks

A and B to a time counter as shown in Figure 6.5.15. Jacks A and B are used to observe the input

signal and output signal of the timer, respectively.

GRT100

TB4

−

-A16

power

supply

Monitoring

jack

-A17

Start

Stop

Time

counter

Figure 6.5.16 Testing Variable Timer (Model 100s, 200s)

⎯ 146 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

• Press 3 (= Timer) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Timer" screen.

• Enter the number corresponding to the timer to be observed. The timers and assigned

numbers are listed in Appendix C.

END

• Press the

key to display the following screen.

/2 T i mer

P r es s E NT ER t o op er a t .

P r es s

to c a nce l .

C AN CE L

ENTER

• Press the

key to start measuring the time. The "TESTING" LED turns on, and

timer is initiated and the following display appears. The input and output signals of the

timer can be observed at monitoring jacks A and B respectively.

Check that the measured time is within ± 10ms of the setting time.

During the test, the following display appears on the LCD and the LEDs above the jacks are

also lit if the input or output signal exists.

/2 T i mer

O pe ra ti n g . . . . . .

P re ss E N D to r es et .

P r es s

to c a nce l .

C AN CE L

END

• Press the

key to reset the input signal to the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns off.

CANCEL

• Press the

key to test other timers. Repeat the above testing.

⎯ 147 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.5.3 Protection Scheme

In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,

fault and post-fault conditions.

Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays TRIP-1 to -5.

Check that the indications and recordings are correct.

6.5.4 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.

Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault records"

screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the applied fault.

Recording events are listed in Table 3.4.1. The top 8 events are external events and others are

internal events. Event recording on the external events can be checked by changing the status of

binary input signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see Section

6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event Records" screen is correct.

Note: Whether to record or not can be set for each event. Change the status of the binary input signal

after confirming that the related event is set to record. (The default setting enables all the events

to be recorded.)

Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.

Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display

only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance records"

screen and check that the descriptions are correct.

Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details

on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

⎯ 148 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test

With the relay connected to the line which is carrying a load current, it is possible to check the

polarity of the voltage transformer and current transformer and the phase rotation with the

metering displays on the LCD screen.

• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g

1 6 / O c t / 1 9 9 7

1 8 : 1 3 3 / 2 0

I a 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I a 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I b 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I b 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I c 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I c 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 1 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I 1 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 2 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I 2 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 0 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I 0 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I n 1 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ° I n 2 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I a 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I b 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I c 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 1 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 2 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I 0 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I n 3 ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ k V ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ °

I d a ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d b ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d 0 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d 0 2 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d 0 3 ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

I d c ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ p u

T H M ∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗ %

Frequency

∗ ∗ . ∗ H z

Note: The magnitude of voltage and current can be set in values on the primary side or on the

secondary side by the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)

Phase angles are expressed taking that of the voltage input as the reference angle.

• Check that the phase rotation is correct.

• Verify the phase relation between voltage and current with a known load current direction.

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test

The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay

and monitoring the breaker that is tripped. Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on

the "Binary output" screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.

Tripping circuit

• Set the breaker to be closed.

• Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary output" screen.

The LCD displays the output modules mounted.

• Enter 1 to select the IO1 module, then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

⎯ 149 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

/3 B O

IO# 1

(0 = Di s ab le 1 =E na bl e)

1 / 5

T P-1

T P-2

T P-

IO#

T P-4

IO# 1

T P-

TP-1 to 5 are output relays with one normally open contact. Models 203 and 204 are not provided

with TP-4 and TP-5.

ENTER

• Enter 1 for TP-1 and press the

END

key.

• Press the

key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

/3 B O

K e ep p res s i ng 1 t o oper a t e .

to ca nce l

P r es s

C AN CE L

• Keep pressing the

key to operate the output relay TP-1 and check that the No. 1 breaker is

tripped.

• Release pressing the

key to reset the operation.

• Repeat the above for other output relays TP-2 to TP-5.

⎯ 150 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

6.7 Maintenance

6.7.1 Regular Testing

The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits which cannot be supervised are binary

input and output circuits and human interfaces.

Therefore regular testing can be minimized to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test

procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output signal of

FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also

recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Auto-supervision "screen on the

LCD.

If any messages are shown on the LCD, the failed module or failed external circuits can be located

by referring to Table 6.7.1.

This table shows the relationship between messages displayed on the LCD and the estimated

failure location. Locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with

(2).

As shown in the table, some of the messages cannot identify the fault location definitely but

suggest plural possible failure locations. In these cases, the failure location is identified by

replacing the suggested failed modules with spare modules one by one until the "Alarm" LED is

turned off.

The replacement or investigation should be performed first for the module or circuit with higher

probability in the table.

If there is a failure and the LCD is not working such as a screen is frozen or not displayed, the

failure location is either SPM or HMI module.

⎯ 151 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message

Failure location

VCT

SPM

IO1 or

IO8

IO2

IO3

HMI

LAN

PLC,

cable cable/ IEC61850

network

data

Checksum err

ROM data err

ROM-RAM err

SRAM err

CPU err

Invalid err

NMI err

BU-RAM err

EEPROM err

A/D err

Sampling err

CT1 err

× (2)

× (1)

CT2 err

CT3 err

DIO err

× (1)

RSM err

× (2)

LCD err

DC supply off

RTC err

PCI err

LAN err

GOOSE stop

Ping err

× (2)

× (1)

×(1)

PLC stop

MAP stop

No-working of

LCD

× (2)

× (1)

The location marked with (1) has a higher probability than the location marked with (2).

⎯ 152 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power

supply circuit or in the microprocessors mounted on the SPM module. Then check the "ALARM"

LED. If it is off, the failure is in the DC power supply circuit. If it is lit, open the relay front panel

and check the LEDs mounted on the SPM module. If the LED is off, the failure is in the DC power

supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors.

In the former case, check if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.

If so, replace the IO1 or IO8 module mounting the DC/DC converter and confirm that the

"ALARM" LED is turned off.

In the latter case, replace the SPM module containing the processors and confirm that the

"ALARM" LED is turned off.

When a failure is detected during regular testing, it will not be difficult to identify the failed

module to be replaced.

Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following

first:

Test circuit connections are correct.

Modules are securely inserted in position.

Correct DC power voltage with correct polarity is applied and connected to the correct

terminals.

Correct AC inputs are applied and connected to the correct terminals.

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can

recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.

Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is

not recommended.

Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (VCT, SPM, IO1, IO2, etc.) and

hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the SPM module should have the same

software name.

The module name is indicated on the bottom front of the relay case. The hardware type-form is

indicated on the module in the following format:

Module name

Hardware type-form

G1PC2-††††

G1SP∗-††††

G1IO1-††††

G1IO2-††††

G1IO3-††††

G1IO8-††††

VCT

SPM

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO8

HMI

⎯ 153 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

The software name is indicated on the memory device on the module with letters such as

GSPTM1-∗∗∗, etc.

CAUTION

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed

wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many

of the electronic components could suffer damage.

CAUTION

After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the data

related to the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original

settings.

The initial replacement procedure is as follows:

• Switch off the DC power supply.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the

DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to

discharge.

• Disconnect the trip outputs.

• Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs.

• Unscrew the relay front cover.

Replacing the Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module (Front Panel)

• Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the

front panel.

• Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

• Remove the two retaining screws and one earthing screw on the relay case side, then detach the

front panel from the relay case.

• Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

Replacing the Transformer (VCT) Module

CAUTION

Before pulling out the transformer module, pull out all other modules. For the

method of pulling out other module, see the section "Replacing other module".

• Open the right-side front panel (HMI module) by unscrewing the two binding screws located

on the left side of the panel.

• Open the left-side front panel by unscrewing the two binding screws located on the right side

of the panel.

• Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the

bar.

• Unplug the ribbon cable on the SPM module by nipping the catch.

• Remove the metal cover by unscrewing the binding screw located at the top and bottom of the

cover.

• Pull out the module.

• Insert the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

Replacing other modules

• Open the right-side front panel (HMI module) by unscrewing the two binding screws

located on the left side of the panel.

⎯ 154 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

• Open the left-side front panel by unscrewing the two binding screws located on the right side

of the panel.

• Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the

bar.

• Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of black

connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the connector.

• Pull out the module by pulling up or down the top and bottom levers.

• Insert the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

• After replacing the SPM module, input the user setting values again.

For failed module tracing and its replacement, see Appendix Q.

6.7.4 Resumption of Service

After replacing the failed module or repairing failed external circuits, take the following

procedures for the relay to restore the service.

• Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the

"ALARM" red LED is not lit.

Note: Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the

ribbon cables are plugged in.

• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 Storage

The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard

60255-6 the storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C

is recommended for long-term storage.

⎯ 155 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing

commissioning or maintenance tests.

• Check that all external connections are correct.

• Check the setting of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are

correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.

• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during

the tests.

• Press the

key and check that no failure message is displayed on the

VIEW

"Auto-supervision" screen.

• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

⎯ 156 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix A

Block Diagram

⎯ 157 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Scheme Logic No.1

DIFT

HOC

DIF

DIFT

(#87)

Selection

F/F

≥ 1

switches for

each element

2f lock

(ON)

5f lock

−

(OFF)

RESET

TRIP-1

TRIP OUTPUT

TP1

(ON)

CONTACT No.1

1OC

L/O

1OC (#150)

1OCI(#151)

2OC (#250)

2OCI(#251)

3OC (#350)

3OCI(#351)

1REF(#187N)

1EF (#150N)

1EFI(#151N)

2REF(#287N)

2EF (#250N)

2EFI(#251N)

3REF(#387N)

3EF (#350N)

3EFI(#351N)

(OFF)

0.00-10.00s

1OCI

2OC

TRIP OUTPUT

TP2

CONTACT No.2

TRIP OUTPUT

TP3

CONTACT No.3

0.00-10.00s

2OCI

3OC

TRIP OUTPUT

TP4

CONTACT No.4

≥ 1

TRIP OUTPUT

TP5

CONTACT No.5

0.00-10.00s

Scheme Logic No.2

3OCI

TRIP-2

DIFT

1OC

1OCI

2OC

2OCI

3OC

3OCI

1REF

1EF

Scheme Logic No.3

TRIP-3

Same as

No.1

circuit

DIFT

1OC

1OCI

2OC

2OCI

3OC

3OCI

1REF

0.00-10.00s

1EFI

Same as

No.1

circuit

2REF

2EF

Scheme Logic No.4

1EF

TRIP-4

DIFT

1EFI

2REF

2EF

1OC

1OCI

2OC

2OCI

3OC

3OCI

1REF

0.00-10.00s

2EFI

1EF

Scheme Logic No.5

2EFI

3REF

3EF

Same as

No.1

circuit

TRIP-5

1EFI

2REF

2EF

DIFT

3REF

3EF

1OC

1OCI

2OC

2OCI

3OC

3OCI

1REF

3EFI

2EFI

3REF

3EF

V/F

THR

FRQ

MT-1

Same as

No.1

circuit

1EF

0.00-10.00s

3EFI

V/F

1EFI

2REF

2EF

3EFI

V/F

THR

FRQ

MT-1

V/F

(#59/81)

MT-2

MT-3

MT-4

≥ 1

2EFI

3REF

3EF

1EF

1EFI

2REF

2EF

0.00-10.00s

THR

FRQ

THR

(#49)

MT-2

MT-3

MT-4

≥ 1

3EFI

2EFI

3REF

3EF

V/F

THR

FRQ

MT-1

FRQ

(#81)

0.00-10.00s

≥ 1

3EFI

V/F

THR

FRQ

MT-1

MT-2

MT-3

MT-4

0.00-10.00s

EXT_MEC.TP1

EXT_MEC.TP2

EXT_MEC.TP3

EXT_MEC.TP4

MT-2

MT-3

MT-4

Ext.Mechanical Trip 1

Ext.Mechanical Trip ２

Ext.Mechanical Trip ３

Ext.Mechanical Trip４

: Binary input/output

: Relay Element

Note: Models 203 and 204 are not provided with TRIP-4 and TRIP-5.

Block Diagram of Transformer Differential Relay GRT100

⎯ 158 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix B

Signal List

⎯ 159 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

CONSTANT_0

CONSTANT_1

constant 0

constant 1

38 DIF_NBLK-A

39 DIF_NBLK-B

40 DIF_NBLK-C

41 DIFT_HOC-A

42 DIFT_HOC-B

43 DIFT_HOC-C

44 DIFT_DIF-A

45 DIFT_DIF-B

46 DIFT_DIF-C

47 1OC-A

Differential element(2f/5f lock is not included)

ditto

Differential relay

ditto

OC relay

48 1OC-B

ditto

49 1OC-C

50 1OCI-A

Inverse time OC relay

51 1OCI-B

ditto

OC relay

ditto

52 1OCI-C

53 2OC-A

54 2OC-B

55 2OC-C

56 2OCI-A

Inverse time OC relay

57 2OCI-B

ditto

OC relay

ditto

58 2OCI-C

59 3OC-A

60 3OC-B

61 3OC-C

62 3OCI-A

Inverse time OC relay

63 3OCI-B

ditto

OC relay

ditto

64 3OCI-C

65 4OC-A

66 4OC-B

67 4OC-C

68 4OCI-A

Inverse time OC relay

ditto

69 4OCI-B

70 4OCI-C

⎯ 160 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

71 1REF

72 1EF

73 1EFI

74 2REF

75 2EF

76 2EFI

77 3REF

78 3EF

79 3EFI

80 V/F-H

81 V/F-T

82 V/F-A

83 THR-S

Restricted earth fault relay

Earth fault relay

Inverse time earth fault relay

Restricted earth fault relay

Earth fault relay

Inverse time earth fault relay

Restricted earth fault relay

Earth fault relay

Inverse time earth fault relay

Overexcitation relay

ditto

Thermal overload relay

87 THR-A

Thermal overload relay

89 FRQ-L1

90 FRQ-L2

91 FRQ-H1

92 FRQ-H2

93 CTF

Frequency relay

ditto

CT failure detection

94 CTF_ALARM

95 2F-A

96 2F-B

97 2F-C

98 5F-A

99 5F-B

100 5F-C

101 CT_SAT-A

102 CT_SAT-B

103 CT_SAT-C

104

CT failure alarm

2nd harmonic inrush current detection

ditto

fifth harmonic components detection

ditto

CT saturation

ditto

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119 FRQBLK

120

UV block signal for FRQ

121 DIF_TRIP

122 2F_LOCK

123 5F_LOCK

124 DIF-T1

125 DIF-T2

126 DIF-T3

127 DIF-T4

128 DIF-T5

129 T1OC

130 1OC-1

131 1OC-2

132 1OC-3

133 1OC-4

134 1OC-5

135 1OCI-1

136 1OCI-2

137 1OCI-3

138 1OCI-4

139 1OCI-5

140 T2OC

DIF relay trip

2F detect

5F detect

DIF relay trip 1

DIF relay trip 2

DIF relay trip 3

DIF relay trip 4

DIF relay trip 5

1OC relay timer

1OC relay trip 1

1OC relay trip 2

1OC relay trip 3

1OC relay trip 4

1OC relay trip 5

1OCI relay trip 1

1OCI relay trip 2

1OCI relay trip 3

1OCI relay trip 4

1OCI relay trip 5

2OC relay timer

⎯ 161 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

141 2OC-1

142 2OC-2

143 2OC-3

144 2OC-4

145 2OC-5

146 2OCI-1

147 2OCI-2

148 2OCI-3

149 2OCI-4

150 2OCI-5

151 T3OC

152 3OC-1

153 3OC-2

154 3OC-3

155 3OC-4

156 3OC-5

157 3OCI-1

158 3OCI-2

159 3OCI-3

160 3OCI-4

161 3OCI-5

162 T4OC

163 4OC-1

164 4OC-2

165 4OC-3

166 4OC-4

167 4OC-5

168 4OCI-1

169 4OCI-2

170 4OCI-3

171 4OCI-4

172 4OCI-5

173 T1REF

174 T1EF

175 1REF-1

176 1REF-2

177 1REF-3

178 1REF-4

179 1REF-5

180 1EF-1

181 1EF-2

182 1EF-3

183 1EF-4

184 1EF-5

185 1EFI-1

186 1EFI-2

187 1EFI-3

188 1EFI-4

189 1EFI-5

190 T2REF

191 T2EF

2OC relay trip 1

2OC relay trip 2

2OC relay trip 3

2OC relay trip 4

2OC relay trip 5

2OCI relay trip 1

2OCI relay trip 2

2OCI relay trip 3

2OCI relay trip 4

2OCI relay trip 5

3OC relay timer

3OC relay trip 1

3OC relay trip 2

3OC relay trip 3

3OC relay trip 4

3OC relay trip 5

3OCI relay trip 1

3OCI relay trip 2

3OCI relay trip 3

3OCI relay trip 4

3OCI relay trip 5

4OC relay timer

4OC relay trip 1

4OC relay trip 2

4OC relay trip 3

4OC relay trip 4

4OC relay trip 5

4OCI relay trip 1

4OCI relay trip 2

4OCI relay trip 3

4OCI relay trip 4

4OCI relay trip 5

1REF relay timer

1EF relay timer

1REF relay trip 1

1REF relay trip 2

1REF relay trip 3

1REF relay trip 4

1REF relay trip 5

1EF relay trip 1

1EF relay trip 2

1EF relay trip 3

1EF relay trip 4

1EF relay trip 5

1EFI relay trip 1

1EFI relay trip 2

1EFI relay trip 3

1EFI relay trip 4

1EFI relay trip 5

2REF relay timer

2EF relay timer

2REF relay trip 1

2REF relay trip 2

2REF relay trip 3

2REF relay trip 4

2REF relay trip 5

2EF relay trip 1

2EF relay trip 2

2EF relay trip 3

2EF relay trip 4

2EF relay trip 5

2EFI relay trip 1

2EFI relay trip 2

2EFI relay trip 3

2EFI relay trip 4

2EFI relay trip 5

3REF relay timer

3EF relay timer

3REF relay trip 1

3REF relay trip 2

192 2REF-1

193 2REF-2

194 2REF-3

195 2REF-4

196 2REF-5

197 2EF-1

198 2EF-2

199 2EF-3

200 2EF-4

201 2EF-5

202 2EFI-1

203 2EFI-2

204 2EFI-3

205 2EFI-4

206 2EFI-5

207 T3REF

208 T3EF

209 3REF-1

210 3REF-2

⎯ 162 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

211 3REF-3

212 3REF-4

213 3REF-5

214 3EF-1

215 3EF-2

216 3EF-3

217 3EF-4

218 3EF-5

219 3EFI-1

220 3EFI-2

221 3EFI-3

222 3EFI-4

223 3EFI-5

224 DIF-T

225 1OCI

226 2OCI

227 3OCI

228 4OCI

229 V/F_TRIP

230 FRQ

231

3REF relay trip 3

3REF relay trip 4

3REF relay trip 5

3EF relay trip 1

3EF relay trip 2

3EF relay trip 3

3EF relay trip 4

3EF relay trip 5

3EFI relay trip 1

3EFI relay trip 2

3EFI relay trip 3

3EFI relay trip 4

3EFI relay trip 5

DIFT relay trip

1OCI relay trip

2OCI relay trip

3OCI relay trip

4OCI relay trip

V/F trip

FRQ trip

232

233

234

235 TV/F-H

236 TV/F-A

237 V/F-1

238 V/F-2

239 V/F-3

240 V/F-4

241 V/F-5

V/F-H relay timer

V/F-A relay timer

V/F relay trip 1

V/F relay trip 2

V/F relay trip 3

V/F relay trip 4

V/F relay trip 5

V/F relay alarm

THR relay trip 1

THR relay trip 2

THR relay trip 3

THR relay trip 4

THR relay trip 5

THR relay alarm

FRQ-L relay timer

FRQ-H relay timer

FRQ-A relay timer

FRQ relay trip 1

FRQ relay trip 2

FRQ relay trip 3

FRQ relay trip 4

FRQ relay trip 5

FRQ relay alarm

Mechanical trip 1

ditto

242 V/F-ALARM

243 THR-1

244 THR-2

245 THR-3

246 THR-4

247 THR-5

248 THR-ALARM

249 TFRQ-L

250 TFRQ-H

251 TFRQ-A

252 FRQ-1

253 FRQ-2

254 FRQ-3

255 FRQ-4

256 FRQ-5

257 FRQ-A

258 MEC.TRIP1-1

259 MEC.TRIP1-2

260 MEC.TRIP1-3

261 MEC.TRIP1-4

262 MEC.TRIP1-5

263 MEC.TRIP2-1

264 MEC.TRIP2-2

265 MEC.TRIP2-3

266 MEC.TRIP2-4

267 MEC.TRIP2-5

268 MEC.TRIP3-1

269 MEC.TRIP3-2

270 MEC.TRIP3-3

271 MEC.TRIP3-4

272 MEC.TRIP3-5

273 MEC.TRIP4-1

274 MEC.TRIP4-2

275 MEC.TRIP4-3

276 MEC.TRIP4-4

277 MEC.TRIP4-5

278 WIND.1_TP-1

279 WIND.2_TP-1

280 WIND.3_TP-1

ditto

Mechanical trip 2

ditto

Mechanical trip 3

ditto

Mechanical trip 4

ditto

Element for trip 1

ditto

⎯ 163 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

281 WIND.4_TP-1

282 MEC.TRIP-1

283 ELEMENT_OR-1

284 TRIP-1

285 WIND.1_TP-2

286 WIND.2_TP-2

287 WIND.3_TP-2

288 WIND.4_TP-2

289 MEC.TRIP-2

290 ELEMENT_OR-2

291 TRIP-2

292 WIND.1_TP-3

293 WIND.2_TP-3

294 WIND.3_TP-3

295 WIND.4_TP-3

296 MEC.TRIP-3

297 ELEMENT_OR-3

298 TRIP-3

299 WIND.1_TP-4

300 WIND.2_TP-4

301 WIND.3_TP-4

302 WIND.4_TP-4

303 MEC.TRIP-4

304 ELEMENT_OR-4

305 TRIP-4

ditto

Trip O/P-1

Element for trip 2

ditto

Trip O/P-2

Element for trip 3

ditto

Trip O/P-3

Element for trip 4

ditto

Trip O/P-4

306 WIND.1_TP-5

307 WIND.2_TP-5

308 WIND.3_TP-5

309 WIND.4_TP-5

310 MEC.TRIP-5

311 ELEMENT_OR-5

312 TRIP-5

Element for trip 5

ditto

Trip O/P-5

313 TRIP

Trip signal shot

314 TRIP-DETOR

315 TP1

Trip O/P OR

Trip command without off-delay timer

316 TP2

317 TP3

318 TP4

319 TP5

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

330 DIFT-DIF_TP

331 DIFT-HOC_TP

332 1REF_TRIP

333 2REF_TRIP

334 3REF_TRIP

335 1OC_TRIP

336 2OC_TRIP

337 3OC_TRIP

338 4OC_TRIP

339 1OCI_TRIP

340 2OCI_TRIP

341 3OCI_TRIP

342 4OCI_TRIP

343 1EF_TRIP

344 2EF_TRIP

345 3EF_TRIP

346 1EFI_TRIP

347 2EFI_TRIP

348 3EFI_TRIP

349 FRQ_TRIP

350 V/F_TP

DIFT-DIF trip signal

DIFT-HOC trip signal

1REF trip signal

2REF trip signal

3REF trip signal

1OC trip signal

2OC trip signal

3OC trip signal

4OC trip signal

1OCI trip signal

2OCI trip signal

3OCI trip signal

4OCI trip signal

1EF trip signal

2EF trip signal

3EF trip signal

1EFI trip signal

2EFI trip signal

3EFI trip signal

FRQ trip signal

V/F trip signal

⎯ 164 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

351 THR_TRIP

352 DIFT_TRIP

Thermal trip signal

DIFT trip signal

353 FRQ-UF_TRIP

Under-FRQ trip signal

Over-FRQ trip signal

Under-FRQ alarm signal

Over-FRQ alarm signal

Mechanical trip 1

354 FRQ-OF_TRIP

355 FRQ-UF_ALARM

356 FRQ-OF_ALARM

357 MEC.TRIP1

358 MEC.TRIP2

Mechanical trip 2

359 MEC.TRIP3

Mechanical trip 3

360 MEC.TRIP4

Mechanical trip 4

361 MEC.TRIP

Mechanical trip

362 V/F-L_TRIP

V/F low level trip signal

V/F high level trip signal

363 V/F-H_TRIP

364

365

366

367

368

369

370 1OC

371 2OC

372 3OC

373 4OC

374 DIFT_HOC

375

OC relay

ditto

Differential relay

376

377

378

379

380

381

382

383

384

385

386

387

388

389

390

391

392

393

394

395

396

397

398

399

400

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

412

413

414

508

509

510

⎯ 165 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

511

512

513 BI1_COMMAND

Binary input signal BI1

Binary input signal BI2

Binary input signal BI3

Binary input signal BI4

Binary input signal BI5

Binary input signal BI6

Binary input signal BI7

Binary input signal BI8

Binary input signal BI9

Binary input signal BI10

Binary input signal BI11

Binary input signal BI12

Binary input signal BI13

Binary input signal BI14

Binary input signal BI15

Binary input signal BI16

514 BI2_COMMAND

515 BI3_COMMAND

516 BI4_COMMAND

517 BI5_COMMAND

518 BI6_COMMAND

519 BI7_COMMAND

520 BI8_COMMAND

521 BI9_COMMAND

522 BI10_COMMAND

523 BI11_COMMAND

524 BI12_COMMAND

525 BI13_COMMAND

526 BI14_COMMAND

527 BI15_COMMAND

528 BI16_COMMAND

529

530

531

532

533

534

535

536

537

538

539

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

547

548

549

550

551

552

553

554

555

556

557

558

559

560

561

562

563

564

565

566

567

568

569

570

571

572

573

574

575

1238

1239

1240

⎯ 166 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1241 IEC_MDBLK

1242 IEC_TESTMODE

1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE

1244 GROUP2_ACTIVE

1245 GROUP3_ACTIVE

1246 GROUP4_ACTIVE

1247 GROUP5_ACTIVE

1248 GROUP6_ACTIVE

1249 GROUP7_ACTIVE

1250 GROUP8_ACTIVE

1251 RLY_FAIL

1252 RLY_OP_BLK

1253 A.M.F._OFF

1254

monitor direction blocked

IEC60870-5-103 testmode

group1 active

group2 active

group3 active

group4 active

group5 active

group6 active

group7 active

group8 active

RELAY FAILURE

RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK

SV BLOCK

1255

1256

1257

1258 RELAY_FAIL-A

1259

RELAY FAILURE (only alarm)

Trip signal hold

1260

1261 TRIP-H

1262

1263 CT1_ERR_UF

1264 CT2_ERR_UF

1265 CT3_ERR_UF

1266 CT4_ERR_UF

1267 CT1_ERR

1268 CT2_ERR

1269 CT3_ERR

1270 CT4_ERR

1271 CT_ERR

1272

CT error(unfiltered)

ditto

CT failure

ditto

1273

1274

1275

1276

1277

1278

1279 GEN_PICKUP

1280 GEN_TRIP

1281

General start/pick-up

General trip

1282

1283

1284 BI1_COM_UF

1285 BI2_COM_UF

1286 BI3_COM_UF

1287 BI4_COM_UF

1288 BI5_COM_UF

1289 BI6_COM_UF

1290 BI7_COM_UF

1291 BI8_COM_UF

1292 BI9_COM_UF

1293 BI10_COM_UF

1294 BI11_COM_UF

1295 BI12_COM_UF

1296 BI13_COM_UF

1297 BI14_COM_UF

1298 BI15_COM_UF

1299 BI16_COM_UF

1300

Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI2 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI3 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI4 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI5 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI6 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI7 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI8 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI9 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI10 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI11 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI12 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI13 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI14 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI15 (unfiltered)

Binary input signal BI16 (unfiltered)

1301

1302

1303

1304

1305

1306

1307

1308

1309

1310

⎯ 167 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1311

1312

1313

1314

1315

1316

1317

1318

1319

1320

1321

1322

1323

1324

1325

1326

1327

1328 GOOSE_IN_Q1

1329 GOOSE_IN_Q2

1330 GOOSE_IN_Q3

1331 GOOSE_IN_Q4

1332 GOOSE_IN_Q5

1333 GOOSE_IN_Q6

1334 GOOSE_IN_Q7

1335 GOOSE_IN_Q8

1336 GOOSE_IN_Q9

1337 GOOSE_IN_Q10

1338 GOOSE_IN_Q11

1339 GOOSE_IN_Q12

1340 GOOSE_IN_Q13

1341 GOOSE_IN_Q14

1342 GOOSE_IN_Q15

1343 GOOSE_IN_Q16

1344 GOOSE_IN_Q17

1345 GOOSE_IN_Q18

1346 GOOSE_IN_Q19

1347 GOOSE_IN_Q20

1348 GOOSE_IN_Q21

1349 GOOSE_IN_Q22

1350 GOOSE_IN_Q23

1351 GOOSE_IN_Q24

1352 GOOSE_IN_Q25

1353 GOOSE_IN_Q26

1354 GOOSE_IN_Q27

1355 GOOSE_IN_Q28

1356 GOOSE_IN_Q29

1357 GOOSE_IN_Q30

1358 GOOSE_IN_Q31

1359 GOOSE_IN_Q32

1360 GOOSE_IN_1

1361 GOOSE_IN_2

1362 GOOSE_IN_3

1363 GOOSE_IN_4

1364 GOOSE_IN_5

1365 GOOSE_IN_6

1366 GOOSE_IN_7

1367 GOOSE_IN_8

1368 GOOSE_IN_9

1369 GOOSE_IN_10

1370 GOOSE_IN_11

1371 GOOSE_IN_12

1372 GOOSE_IN_13

1373 GOOSE_IN_14

1374 GOOSE_IN_15

1375 GOOSE_IN_16

1376 GOOSE_IN_17

1377 GOOSE_IN_18

1378 GOOSE_IN_19

1379 GOOSE_IN_20

1380 GOOSE_IN_21

Goose Input Quality #1

Goose Input Quality #2

Goose Input Quality #3

Goose Input Quality #4

Goose Input Quality #5

Goose Input Quality #6

Goose Input Quality #7

Goose Input Quality #8

Goose Input Quality #9

Goose Input Quality #10

Goose Input Quality #11

Goose Input Quality #12

Goose Input Quality #13

Goose Input Quality #14

Goose Input Quality #15

Goose Input Quality #16

Goose Input Quality #17

Goose Input Quality #18

Goose Input Quality #19

Goose Input Quality #20

Goose Input Quality #21

Goose Input Quality #22

Goose Input Quality #23

Goose Input Quality #24

Goose Input Quality #25

Goose Input Quality #26

Goose Input Quality #27

Goose Input Quality #28

Goose Input Quality #29

Goose Input Quality #30

Goose Input Quality #31

Goose Input Quality #32

Goose Input #1

Goose Input #2

Goose Input #3

Goose Input #4

Goose Input #5

Goose Input #6

Goose Input #7

Goose Input #8

Goose Input #9

Goose Input #10

Goose Input #11

Goose Input #12

Goose Input #13

Goose Input #14

Goose Input #15

Goose Input #16

Goose Input #17

Goose Input #18

Goose Input #19

Goose Input #20

Goose Input #21

⎯ 168 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1381 GOOSE_IN_22

1382 GOOSE_IN_23

1383 GOOSE_IN_24

1384 GOOSE_IN_25

1385 GOOSE_IN_26

1386 GOOSE_IN_27

1387 GOOSE_IN_28

1388 GOOSE_IN_29

1389 GOOSE_IN_30

1390 GOOSE_IN_31

1391 GOOSE_IN_32

1392

Goose Input #22

Goose Input #23

Goose Input #24

Goose Input #25

Goose Input #26

Goose Input #27

Goose Input #28

Goose Input #29

Goose Input #30

Goose Input #31

Goose Input #32

1393

1394

1395

1396

1397

1398

1399

1400

1401 LOCAL_OP_ACT

1402 REMOTE_OP_ACT

1403 NORM_LED_ON

1404 ALM_LED_ON

1405 TRIP_LED_ON

1406 TEST_LED_ON

1407

local operation active

remote operation active

IN-SERVICE LED ON

ALARM LED ON

TRIP LED ON

TEST LED ON

1408

1409 LED_RESET

1410

1411

1412

TRIP LED RESET

1413 PROT_COM_ON

1414 PRG_LED1_ON

1415 PRG_LED2_ON

1416 PRG_LED3_ON

1417 PRG_LED4_ON

1418

IEC103 communication command

PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON

PROGRAMMABLE LED2 ON

PROGRAMMABLE LED3 ON

PROGRAMMABLE LED4 ON

1419

1420

1421

1422

1423

1424

1425

1426

1427

1428

1429

1430

1431

1432

1433

1434 F.Record_DONE

1435 F.Record_CLR

1436 E.Record_CLR

1437 D.Record_CLR

1438 Data_Lost

1439

fault record sotred

Fault record clear

Event record clear

Disturbance record clear

Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error

1440

1441

1442

1443

1444

1445 PLC_data_CHG

1446 IEC103_data_CHG

1447 IEC850_data_CHG

1448 Sys.set_change

1449 Rly.set_change

1450 Grp.set_change

PLC data change

IEC-103 data change

IEC-850 data change

System setting change

Relay setting change

Group setting change

⎯ 169 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1451

1452

1453

1454

1455

1456 KEY-VIEW

VIEW key status (1:pressed)

RESET key status (2:pressed)

ENTER key status (3:pressed)

END key status (4:pressed)

CANCEL key status (5:pressed)

1457 KEY-RESET

1458 KEY-ENTER

1459 KEY-END

1460 KEY-CANCEL

1461

1462

1463

1464

1465 DC_supply_err

1466 RTC_err

1467 PCI_err

1468 GOOSE_stop

1469 Ping_err

1470 PLC_err

1471 61850_err

1472 SUM_err

1473 ROM_RAM_err

1474 SRAM_err

1475 BU_RAM_err

1476

DC supply error

RTC stopped

PCI bus error

GOOSE stopped

Ping no anwer

PLC stopeed

61850 stopped

Program ROM checksum error

Rom - Ram mismatch error

SRAM memory monitoring error

BU-RAM memory monitoring error

1477 EEPROM_err

1478

EEPROM memory monitoring error

1479 A/D_err

1480 CPU_err

1481 Invalid

1482 NMI

1483 Sampling_err

1484 DIO_err

1485 LAN_err

1486 LCD_err

1487 ROM_data_err

1488

A/D accuracy checking error

Program error

Invalid error

NMI

Sampling error

DIO card connection error

LAN error

LCD panel connection error

8M Romdata error

1489

1490

1491

1492

1493

1494

1495

1496

1497

1498

1499

1500

1501

1502

1503

1504

1505

1506

1507

1508

1509

1510

1533

1534

1535

⎯ 170 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1536 EXT_MEC.TP1

1537 EXT_MEC.TP2

1538 EXT_MEC.TP3

1539 EXT_MEC.TP4

1540 IND.RESET

1541

External mechanical trip commnad 1

External mechanical trip commnad 2

External mechanical trip commnad 3

External mechanical trip commnad 4

Indication reset command

1542

1543

1544

1545

1546

1547

1548

1549

1550

1551

1552 EVENT1

1553 EVENT2

1554 EVENT3

1555

External event command 1

External event command 2

External event command 3

1556

1557

1558

1559

1560

1561

1562

1563

1564

1565

1566

1567

1568 PROT_BLOCK

1569 DIF_BLOCK

1570 1REF_BLOCK

1571 1OC_BLOCK

1572 1OCI_BLOCK

1573 1EF_BLOCK

1574 1EFI_BLOCK

1575 2REF_BLOCK

1576 2OC_BLOCK

1577 2OCI_BLOCK

1578 2EF_BLOCK

1579 2EFI_BLOCK

1580 3REF_BLOCK

1581 3OC_BLOCK

1582 3OCI_BLOCK

1583 3EF_BLOCK

1584 3EFI_BLOCK

1585 4OC_BLOCK

1586 4OCI_BLOCK

1587 FRQ_BLOCK

1588 FRQ-A_BLOCK

1589 V/F_BLOCK

1590 V/F-A_BLOCK

1591 THR_BLOCK

1592 THR-A_BLOCK

1593 MEC.TP1_BLOCK

1594 MEC.TP2_BLOCK

1595 MEC.TP3_BLOCK

1596 MEC.TP4_BLOCK

1597

Protection block command

DIF trip block command

1REF trip block command

1OC trip block command

1OCI trip block command

1EF trip block command

1EFI trip block command

2REF trip block command

2OC trip block command

2OCI trip block command

2EF trip block command

2EFI trip block command

3REF trip block command

3OC trip block command

3OCI trip block command

3EF trip block command

3EFI trip block command

4OC trip block command

4OCI trip block command

FRQ trip block command

FRQ-A trip block command

V/F trip block command

V/F-A trip block command

THR trip block command

THR-A trip block command

MEC.TP1 trip block command

MEC.TP2 trip block command

MEC.TP3 trip block command

MEC.TP4 trip block command

1598

1599

1600 TP1_DELAY

1601 TP2_DELAY

1602 TP3_DELAY

1603 TP4_DELAY

1604 TP5_DELAY

1605

Trip command off-delay timer setting

⎯ 171 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1606

1607

1608

1609

1610

1611

1612

1613

1614

1615

1616 DIF-A_BLOCK

1617 DIF-B_BLOCK

1618 DIF-C_BLOCK

1619

DIF-A trip blocking command

DIF-B trip blocking command

DIF-C trip blocking command

1620

1621

1622

1623

1624

1625

1626

1627

1628

1629

1630

1631

1632

1633

1634

1635

1636

1637

1638

1639

1640

1641

1642

1643

1644

1645

1646

1647

1648

1649

1650

1651

1652

1653

1654

1655

1656

1657

1658

1659

1660

1661

1662

1663

1664

1665

1666

1667

1668

1669

1670

1788

1789

1790

⎯ 172 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

1791

1792 IO#1-TP1

1793 IO#1-TP2

1794 IO#1-TP3

1795 IO#1-TP4

1796 IO#1-TP5

1797

Binary output signal of TP1

Binary output signal of TP2

Binary output signal of TP3

Binary output signal of TP4

Binary output signal of TP5

1798

1799

1800

1801

1802

1803

1804

1805

1806

1807

1808

1809

1810

1811

1812

1813

1814

1815

1816

1817

1818

1819

1820

1821

1822

1823

1824

1825

1826

1827

1828

1829

1830

1831

1832

1833

1834

1835

1836

1837

1838

1839

1840

1841

1842

1843

1844

1845

1846

1847

1848

1849

1850

1851

1852

1853

1854

1855

2618

2619

2620

⎯ 173 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

2621

2622

2623

2624 F.RECORD1

Fault record stored command 1

Fault record stored command 2

Fault record stored command 3

Fault record stored command 4

2625 F.RECORD2

2626 F.RECORD3

2627 F.RECORD4

2628

2629

2630

2631

2632 D.RECORD1

Disturbance record stored command 1

Disturbance record stored command 2

Disturbance record stored command 3

Disturbance record stored command 4

2633 D.RECORD2

2634 D.RECORD3

2635 D.RECORD4

2636

2637

2638

2639

2640 SET.GROUP1

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group1)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group2)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group3)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group4)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group5)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group6)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group7)

Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group8)

2641 SET.GROUP2

2642 SET.GROUP3

2643 SET.GROUP4

2644 SET.GROUP5

2645 SET.GROUP6

2646 SET.GROUP7

2647 SET.GROUP8

2648

2649

2650

2651

2652

2653

2654

2655

2656 CON_TPMD1

User configurable trip mode in fault record

2657 CON_TPMD2

ditto

2658 CON_TPMD3

2659 CON_TPMD4

2660 CON_TPMD5

2661 CON_TPMD6

2662 CON_TPMD7

2663 CON_TPMD8

2664

2665

2666

2667

2668

2669

2670

2671

2672

2673

2674

2675

2676

2677

2678

2679

2680

2681

2682

2683

2684

2685

2686 PROT_COM_RECV

Protection inactivate command received

TRIP LED RESET command received

2687

2688 TPLED_RST_RCV

2810

⎯ 174 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

2811

2812

2813

2814

2815

2816 TEMP001

2817 TEMP002

2818 TEMP003

2819 TEMP004

2820 TEMP005

2821 TEMP006

2822 TEMP007

2823 TEMP008

2824 TEMP009

2825 TEMP010

2826 TEMP011

2827 TEMP012

2828 TEMP013

2829 TEMP014

2830 TEMP015

2831 TEMP016

2832 TEMP017

2833 TEMP018

2834 TEMP019

2835 TEMP020

2836 TEMP021

2837 TEMP022

2838 TEMP023

2839 TEMP024

2840 TEMP025

2841 TEMP026

2842 TEMP027

2843 TEMP028

2844 TEMP029

2845 TEMP030

2846 TEMP031

2847 TEMP032

2848 TEMP033

2849 TEMP034

2850 TEMP035

2851 TEMP036

2852 TEMP037

2853 TEMP038

2854 TEMP039

2855 TEMP040

2856 TEMP041

2857 TEMP042

2858 TEMP043

2859 TEMP044

2860 TEMP045

2861 TEMP046

2862 TEMP047

2863 TEMP048

2864 TEMP049

2865 TEMP050

2866 TEMP051

2867 TEMP052

2868 TEMP053

2869 TEMP054

2870 TEMP055

2871 TEMP056

2872 TEMP057

2873 TEMP058

2874 TEMP059

2875 TEMP060

2876 TEMP061

2877 TEMP062

2878 TEMP063

2879 TEMP064

2880 TEMP065

⎯ 175 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

2881 TEMP066

2882 TEMP067

2883 TEMP068

2884 TEMP069

2885 TEMP070

2886 TEMP071

2887 TEMP072

2888 TEMP073

2889 TEMP074

2890 TEMP075

2891 TEMP076

2892 TEMP077

2893 TEMP078

2894 TEMP079

2895 TEMP080

2896 TEMP081

2897 TEMP082

2898 TEMP083

2899 TEMP084

2900 TEMP085

2901 TEMP086

2902 TEMP087

2903 TEMP088

2904 TEMP089

2905 TEMP090

2906 TEMP091

2907 TEMP092

2908 TEMP093

2909 TEMP094

2910 TEMP095

2911 TEMP096

2912 TEMP097

2913 TEMP098

2914 TEMP099

2915 TEMP100

2916 TEMP101

2917 TEMP102

2918 TEMP103

2919 TEMP104

2920 TEMP105

2921 TEMP106

2922 TEMP107

2923 TEMP108

2924 TEMP109

2925 TEMP110

2926 TEMP111

2927 TEMP112

2928 TEMP113

2929 TEMP114

2930 TEMP115

2931 TEMP116

2932 TEMP117

2933 TEMP118

2934 TEMP119

2935 TEMP120

2936 TEMP121

2937 TEMP122

2938 TEMP123

2939 TEMP124

2940 TEMP125

2941 TEMP126

2942 TEMP127

2943 TEMP128

2944 TEMP129

2945 TEMP130

2946 TEMP131

2947 TEMP132

2948 TEMP133

2949 TEMP134

2950 TEMP135

⎯ 176 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

2951 TEMP136

2952 TEMP137

2953 TEMP138

2954 TEMP139

2955 TEMP140

2956 TEMP141

2957 TEMP142

2958 TEMP143

2959 TEMP144

2960 TEMP145

2961 TEMP146

2962 TEMP147

2963 TEMP148

2964 TEMP149

2965 TEMP150

2966 TEMP151

2967 TEMP152

2968 TEMP153

2969 TEMP154

2970 TEMP155

2971 TEMP156

2972 TEMP157

2973 TEMP158

2974 TEMP159

2975 TEMP160

2976 TEMP161

2977 TEMP162

2978 TEMP163

2979 TEMP164

2980 TEMP165

2981 TEMP166

2982 TEMP167

2983 TEMP168

2984 TEMP169

2985 TEMP170

2986 TEMP171

2987 TEMP172

2988 TEMP173

2989 TEMP174

2990 TEMP175

2991 TEMP176

2992 TEMP177

2993 TEMP178

2994 TEMP179

2995 TEMP180

2996 TEMP181

2997 TEMP182

2998 TEMP183

2999 TEMP184

3000 TEMP185

3001 TEMP186

3002 TEMP187

3003 TEMP188

3004 TEMP189

3005 TEMP190

3006 TEMP191

3007 TEMP192

3008 TEMP193

3009 TEMP194

3010 TEMP195

3011 TEMP196

3012 TEMP197

3013 TEMP198

3014 TEMP199

3015 TEMP200

3016 TEMP201

3017 TEMP202

3018 TEMP203

3019 TEMP204

3020 TEMP205

⎯ 177 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal list

No.

Signal Name

Contents

3021 TEMP206

3022 TEMP207

3023 TEMP208

3024 TEMP209

3025 TEMP210

3026 TEMP211

3027 TEMP212

3028 TEMP213

3029 TEMP214

3030 TEMP215

3031 TEMP216

3032 TEMP217

3033 TEMP218

3034 TEMP219

3035 TEMP220

3036 TEMP221

3037 TEMP222

3038 TEMP223

3039 TEMP224

3040 TEMP225

3041 TEMP226

3042 TEMP227

3043 TEMP228

3044 TEMP229

3045 TEMP230

3046 TEMP231

3047 TEMP232

3048 TEMP233

3049 TEMP234

3050 TEMP235

3051 TEMP236

3052 TEMP237

3053 TEMP238

3054 TEMP239

3055 TEMP240

3056 TEMP241

3057 TEMP242

3058 TEMP243

3059 TEMP244

3060 TEMP245

3061 TEMP246

3062 TEMP247

3063 TEMP248

3064 TEMP249

3065 TEMP250

3066 TEMP251

3067 TEMP252

3068 TEMP253

3069 TEMP254

3070 TEMP255

3071 TEMP256

⎯ 178 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix C

Variable Timer List

⎯ 179 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Variable Timer List

Timer

Timer No.

Contents

T1OC

T2OC

T3OC

(T4OC)

T1REF

T1EF

1OC TRIP TIMER

2OC TRIP TIMER

3OC TRIP TIMER

(4OC TRIP TIMER)

1REF TRIP TIMER

1EF TRIP TIMER

2REF TRIP TIMER

2EF TRIP TIMER

3REF TRIP TIMER

3EF TRIP TIMER

V/F-H TRIP TIMER

V/F-A ALARM TIMER

FRQ-L TRIP TIMER

FRQ-H TRIP TIMER

FRQ-A ALARM TIMER

T2REF

T2EF

T3REF

T3EF

TVFH

TVFA

TFRQL

TFRQH

TFRQA

⎯ 180 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix D

Binary Output Default Setting List

⎯ 181 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Binary Output Default Setting List

Relay

Model

Module

Name

BO No.

Signal Name

Contents

Setting

Logic

Signal No.

Timer

(OR: 1, AND:

(OFF: 0, ON: 1)

GRT100

-101

IO2

IO3

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

DIFT

TRIP First

284

TRIP Second

291

DIFT relay operating

224

1OC, 1OCI

2OC, 2OCI

1REF, 1EF, 1EFI

2REF, 2EF, 2EFI

FRQ

1OC or 1OCI relay operating

2OC or 2OCI relay operating

1REF, 1EF or 1EFI relay operating

2REF, 2EF or 2EFI relay operating

FRQ relay operating

129, 225

140, 226

173, 174, 73

190, 191, 76

230

V/F

V/F-L, H relay operating

229

V/F-A

V/F-A relay operating

242

THR

THR-L, H relay operating

THR-A relay operating

248

THR-A

EXT_MEC.TP1, 2, 3, 4

External mechanical relay trip

1536, 1537, 1538, 1539

GRT100

-102

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

DIFT

TRIP First

284

291

TRIP Second

DIFT relay operating

1OC or 1OCI relay operating

2OC or 2OCI relay operating

1REF relay operating

2REF relay operating

1EF or 1EFI relay operating

2EF or 2EFI relay operating

FRQ relay operating

V/F-T relay operating

V/F-H relay operating

V/F-A relay operating

224

1OC, 1OCI

2OC, 2OCI

1REF

129, 225

140, 226

173

2REF

190

1EF, 1EFI

2EF, 2EFI

FRQ

174, 73

191, 76

230

V/F-T

V/F-H

235

V/F-A

242

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

THR

THR-L, H relay operating

THR-A relay operating

TRIP First

THR-A

248

TRIP-1

284

TRIP-2

TRIP Second

291

TRIP-1

TRIP First

284

TRIP-2

TRIP Second

291

EXT_MEC. TP1

EXT_MEC. TP2

EXT_MEC. TP3

EXT_MEC. TP4

External mechanical relay trip 1

External mechanical relay trip 2

External mechanical relay trip 3

External mechanical relay trip 4

1536

1537

1538

1539

⎯ 182 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Relay

Model

Module

Name

BO No.

Signal Name

Contents

Setting

Logic

Signal No.

Timer

(OR: 1, AND:

(OFF: 0, ON: 1)

GRT100

-201

IO2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TRIP-1

TRIP First

284

TRIP-2

TRIP Second

TRIP Third

291

TRIP-3

298

224

DIFT

DIFT relay operating

1OC, 1OCI, 1REF, 1EF,

1OC, 1OCI, 1REF, 1EF or 1EFI relay

operating

129, 225, 173, 174, 73

1EFI

BO6

BO7

2OC, 2OCI, 2REF, 2EF,

2OC, 2OCI, 2REF, 2EF or 2EFI relay

operating

140, 226, 190, 191, 76

151, 227, 207, 208, 79

2EFI

3OC, 3OCI, 3REF, 3EF,

3OC, 3OCI, 3REF, 3EF or 3EFI relay

operating

3EFI

BO8

FRQ

FRQ relay operating

230

BO9

V/F

V/F-L, H relay operating

V/F-A relay operating

THR-L, H relay operating

THR-A relay operating

External mechanical relay trip

229

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

V/F-A

242

THR

248

THR-A

EXT_MEC. TP1, 2, 3, 4

1536, 1537, 1538, 1539

GRT100

-202

IO2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

TRIP-1

TRIP First

284

291

TRIP-2

TRIP Second

TRIP-3

TRIP Third

298

DIFT

DIFT relay operating

1OC or 1OCI relay operating

2OC or 2OCI relay operating

3OC or 3OCI relay operating

1REF relay operating

2REF relay operating

3REF relay operating

1EF or 1EFI relay operating

2EF or 2EFI relay operating

3EF or 3EFI relay operating

224

1OC, 1OCI

2OC, 2OCI

3OC, 3OCI

1REF

129, 225

140, 226

151, 227

173

2REF

190

3REF

207

1EF, 1EFI

2EF, 2EFI

3EF, 2EFI

174, 73

191, 76

208, 79

IO3

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

FRQ

FRQ relay operating

230

V/F-T

V/F-T relay operating

V/F-H

V/F-H relay operating

235

242

V/F-A

V/F-A relay operating

THR

THR-L, H relay operating

THR-A relay operating

THR-A

248

1536

1537

1538

1539

EXT_MEC. TP1

EXT_MEC. TP2

EXT_MEC. TP3

EXT_MEC. TP4

External mechanical relay trip 1

External mechanical relay trip 2

External mechanical relay trip 3

External mechanical relay trip 4

⎯ 183 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Relay

Model

Module

Name

BO No.

Signal Name

Contents

Setting

Logic

Signal No.

Timer

(OR: 1, AND:

(OFF: 0, ON: 1)

GRT100

-203

IO2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TRIP-1

TRIP First

284

TRIP-2

TRIP Second

TRIP Third

291

TRIP-3

298

224

DIFT

DIFT relay operating

1OC, 1OCI, 1REF, 1EF,

1OC, 1OCI, 1REF, 1EF or 1EFI relay

operating

129, 225, 173, 174, 73

1EFI

BO6

BO7

2OC, 2OCI, 2REF, 2EF,

2OC, 2OCI, 2REF, 2EF or 2EFI relay

operating

140, 226, 190, 191, 76

151, 227, 207, 208, 79

2EFI

3OC, 3OCI, 3REF, 3EF,

3OC, 3OCI, 3REF, 3EF or 3EFI relay

operating

3EFI

BO8

FRQ

FRQ relay operating

230

BO9

V/F

V/F-L, H relay operating

V/F-A relay operating

THR-L, H relay operating

THR-A relay operating

External mechanical relay trip

229

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

V/F-A

242

THR

248

THR-A

EXT_MEC. TP1, 2, 3, 4

1536, 1537, 1538, 1539

GRT100

-204

IO2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

TRIP-1

TRIP First

284

291

TRIP-2

TRIP Second

TRIP-3

TRIP Third

298

DIFT

DIFT relay operating

1OC or 1OCI relay operating

2OC or 2OCI relay operating

3OC or 3OCI relay operating

1REF relay operating

2REF relay operating

3REF relay operating

1EF or 1EFI relay operating

2EF or 2EFI relay operating

3EF or 3EFI relay operating

224

1OC, 1OCI

2OC, 2OCI

3OC, 3OCI

1REF

129, 225

140, 226

151, 227

173

2REF

190

3REF

207

1EF, 1EFI

2EF, 2EFI

3EF, 2EFI

174, 73

191, 76

208, 79

IO3

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

FRQ

FRQ relay operating

230

V/F-T

V/F-T relay operating

V/F-H

V/F-H relay operating

235

242

V/F-A

V/F-A relay operating

THR

THR-L, H relay operating

THR-A relay operating

THR-A

248

1536

1537

1538

1539

EXT_MEC. TP1

EXT_MEC. TP2

EXT_MEC. TP3

EXT_MEC. TP4

External mechanical relay trip 1

External mechanical relay trip 2

External mechanical relay trip 3

External mechanical relay trip 4

⎯ 184 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix E

Details of Relay Menu and

LCD & Button Operation

⎯ 185 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

1=Record

2=Status

3=Setting(view)

5=Test

4=Setting(change)

/1 Record

1=Fault record

3=Disturbance record

2=Event record

2=Clear

/2 Fault record

1=Display

/3 Fault record

2/8

/4 Fault record #2

3/33

#1 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913

#2 12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622

#3 30/Jan/1997 15:06:11.835

16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913

Phase BC

DIFT

Trip ABC

/2 Fault record

Clear all fault records?

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No

/2 Event record

1=Display

/3 Event record

16/Oct/1998 23:18:04.294 Trip

16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913 Trip

2/48

Off

2=Clear

12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622 Rly.set change

/2 Event record

Clear all event records?

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No

/2 Disturbance record

1=Display 2=Clear

/3 Disturbance record

1/ 11

#1 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913

#2 12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622

#3 30/Jan/1997 15:06:11.835

/2 Disturbance record

Clear all disturbance records?

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No

/1 Status

1=Metering

3=Relay element

5=Clock adjustment

/2 Metering 12/Feb/1998 22:56 3/13

Ia1 ***.*kA ***.* Ia2 **.**kA ***.*

Ib1 ***.*kA ***.* Ib2 **.**kA ***.*

Ic1 ***.*kA ***.* Ic2 **.**kA ***.*

2=Binary I/O

4=Time sync source

/2 Binary input & output

3/ 5

Input (IO#1)

Input (IO#2)

Output(IO#1-trip)[000 00

[000 000 000 000 000]

[000

]

/2 Relay element

3/ 9

DIFT

REF

[000 000 000 000

[000

[000 000 000 00

]

/2 Time synchronization source

*IRIG: Active

3/ 4

RSM: Inactive

IEC: Inactive

/2 12/Feb/1998 22:56:19 [local] 1/5

Minute ( 0 - 59) : 56 _

Hour ( 0 - 23) : 22

Day

( 1 - 31) : 12

a-1

⎯ 186 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

a-1

/1 Setting(view)

1=Version 2=Description 3=Comm.

4=Record 5=Status

6=Protection

7=Binary input 8=Binary output 9=LED

/2 Relay version

Relay type:

Serial No.:

3/ 8

********************

Main software: ********************

/2 Description

Plant name:

Description:

********************

/2 Communication

/3 Address/Parameter

3/***

1=Address/Parameter

2=Switch

HDLC (

SYADJ(

IP1-2(

)

IEC (

0 ms ) IP1-1(

IP1-3(

)

/3 Switch

PRTCL1 1=HDLC 2=1EC103

3/***

232C

1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 4

IECBR

1=9.6 2=19.2

/2 Record

1=Fault record

2=Disturbance record

/3 Fault record

1/1

2= Event record

Phase mode

1=Operating 2=Fault 1

/3 Event record

1=Signal no.

2=Event name

/4 Signal no.

BITRN( 128

3/65

)

EV1 ( 3071

)

EV2 (

EV4 (

EV3 (

EV5 (

/4 Event name

3/128

Event name1 [Event record name1 ]

Event name2

Event name3

[

]

/3 Disturbance record

1=Record time & starter

2=Scheme switch

/4 Record time & starter

3/ 4

Time ( 3.0 s ) 1OCPS( 0.10 pu )

2OCPS( 0.10 pu ) 3OCPS( 0.10 pu )

1OCPG( 0.10 pu ) 2OCPG( 0.10 pu )

3=Binary signal

4=Signal name

/4 Scheme switch

TRIP1

TRIP2

1/16

0=Off 1=On

TRIP3

/4 Binary signal

3/16

SIG1 ( 128

)

SIG2 ( 3071

)

SIG3 (

SIG5 (

SIG4 (

SIG6 (

/2 Status

1=Metering

2=Time Synchronization

3=Time zone

/3 Metering

Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1

1/ 1

/4 Signal name

Signal name1 [Signal name1

3/32

]

Signal name2

Signal name3

[

/3 Time synchronization

0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC 4=SNTP

Current No.= 2

/3 Time zone

1/ 1

GMT ( * * hrs ) GMTm ( * * min )

a-1, b-1

⎯ 187 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

a-1 b-1

/2 Protection

(Active group= *)

1=Group1 2=Group2 3=Group3 4=Group4

5=Group5 6=Group6 7=Group7 8=Group8

/3 Protection

1=Transformer parameter

2=Trip

(Group 1)

/4 Transformer parameter

1= VT & CT ratio

(Group 1)

/5 VT & CT ratio

1CT ( 2000

3CT ( 1500

3/ 4

)

2CT ( 1500

1nCT ( 1000

3nCT ( 2000

)

2nCT (

500

/4 Trip

/5 Phase matching

1=Alpha 2=Beta

1=Phase matching

2=Scheme switch

3=Protection element

Current No.=2

Select No. = _

/5 Scheme switch

3/∗∗∗

DIFTPMD 1=3POR 2=1P

1REF

2REF

1=1IO 2=2IO 3=3IO

/5 Protection element

(Group 1)

/6 DIFT

ik ( 0.10 pu ) p1

p2 50 % ) kp ( 1.00 pu )

3/ 7

10 % )

1=DIFT

4=THR

2=REF

5=V/F

3=OC

(

6=FRQ

(

kct1 ( 0.50

) kct2 ( 0.50

)

/6 REF

3/11

1ik ( 0.50 pu ) 1kct1( 1.00

1kct2( 1.00 ) 1kct3( 1.00

)

1p2 (

10 % ) 1kp ( 1.00pu )

/6 OC

3/12

1OC ( 0.10 pu ) 2OC ( 0.10 pu )

3OC ( 0.10 pu ) T1OC ( 10.00 s )

T2OC ( 10.00 s ) T3OC ( 10.00 s )

/3 Protection

1=Transformer parameter

2=Trip

(Group 2)

/6 THR

3/ 3

(

0.5 min) k

IB ( 1.00 pu ) lp ( 0.10 pu )

TA 0 min)

( 0.10

)

(

/3 Protection

1=Transformer parameter

2=Trip

(Group 8)

/6 V/F

3/ 5

( 1.10 pu )

( 1.30 pu )

( 3 s )

( 100.0 V ) A

( 1.20 pu ) H

(

1 s ) HT

/6 FRQ

81-1 ( 45.00 Hz ) 81-2 ( 55.00 Hz )

UV 40 V ) TFRQL( 1.00 s )

TFRQH( 1.00 s ) TFRQA( 1.00 s )

3/ 3

/2 Binary input

3/16

BISW 1 1=Norm 2=Inv

BISW 2 1=Norm 2=Inv

BISW 3 1=Norm 2=Inv

(

/2 Binary output

/3 Binary output

(IO#2) 3/13

1=IO#2

2=IO#3

BO1 ( 1, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0)AND,

BO2 ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) OR,

BO3 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,

/3 Binary output

(IO#3) 3/10

BO1 ( 1, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0)AND,

BO2 ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) OR,

BO3 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,

/2 LED

LED1

LED2

3/ 4

0) AND,I

0) OR,I

0) OR,L

(

1, 309,

0, 0,

15, 16, 17,

LED3

a-1

⎯ 188 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

a-1

: Password trap

Password

Input password [_ ]

/1 Setting(change)

1=Password 2=Description 3=Comm.

4=Record 5=Status

6=Protection

7=Binary input 8=Binary output 9=LED

: Confirmation trap

/2 *************

Change settings?

/2 Password

Input new password

Retype new password

[ _ ]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No

[

]

/2 Description

/3 Plant name [ _

]

1=Plant name 2=Description

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_← →

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=>← →

0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^

← →

/3 Description [ _

]

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_← →

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=>← →

0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^

← →

/2 Communication

1=Address/Parameter

2=Switch

/3 Address/Parameter

1/***

HDLC (

IEC (

32):

1 _

0- 254):

SYADJ( -9999- 9999):

/3 Switch

PRTCL1 1=HDLC 2=1EC103

1/***

2 _

232C

1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 4

IECBR 1=9.6 2=19.2

/3 Fault record

Phase mode 1=Operating 2=Fault 1 _

1/1

/2 Record

1=Fault record

2=Event record

2=Disturbance record

/3 Event record

1/129

BITRN(

EV1 (

EV2 (

0- 128):

0- 3071):

128 _

/3 Disturbance record

1=Record time & starter

2=Scheme switch

/4 Record time & starter

Time ( 0.1- 3.0):

1OCPS( 0.10- 20.00):

2OCPS( 0.10- 20.00):

1/ 7

2.0 _

0.10

3=Binary signal

/4 Scheme switch

1/16

1 _

TRIP1

TRIP2

TRIP3

0=Off 1=On

/4 Binary signal

1/32

SIG1 (

SIG2 (

SIG3 (

0- 3071):

1 _

/2 Status

/3 Metering

1/ 1

1=Metering

Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1_

2=Time Synchronization

3=Time zone

/3 Time synchronization

0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC 4=SNTP

Current No.=0

Select No. = _

/3 Time zone

1/ 2

GMT ( -12- +12):

GMTm ( -59- +59):

+9 _ hrs

min

a-1

b-2

⎯ 189 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

a-1

b-2

/2 Protection

1=Change active group

2=Change setting

3=Copy group

/3Change active group(Active group= *)

1=Group1 2=Group2 3=Group3 4=Group4

5=Group5 6=Group6 7=Group7 8=Group8

Current No.= *

Select No.= _

/3 Change setting (Active group= *)

1=Group1 2=Group2 3=Group3 4=Group4

5=Group5 6=Group6 7=Group7 8=Group8

/4 Protection

1=Transformer parameter

2=Trip

(Group 1)

/5 Transformer parameter

1=VT & CT ratio

(Group 1)

/6 VT & CT ratio

1/ 7

1CT (

2CT (

3CT (

1- 20000):

2000 _

1000

400

/5 Trip

/6 Phase matching

1=Alpha 2=Beta

1=Phase matching

2=Scheme switch

3=Protection element

Current No.=2

Select No. = _

/6 Scheme switch

DIFTPMD 1=3POR 2=1P

1/∗∗∗

1 _

1REF

2REF

1=1IO 2=2IO 3=3IO

/6 Protection element

(Group= 1)

3=OC

6=FRQ

/7 DIFT

ik ( 0.10- 1.00): 0.10 _

1/13

1=DIFT

4=THR

2=REF

5=V/F

p1 (

p2 (

10- 100):

10- 200): 100

/7 REF

1/21

1ik ( 0.05- 0.50): 0.05 _ pu

1kct1( 1.00- 50.00): 1.00

1kct2( 1.00- 50.00): 1.00

/7 OC

1/24

1OC ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 _ pu

2OC ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10

3OC ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10

/7 THR

1/ 5

0.5 _ min

(

0.5- 500.0):

(

0.10- 4.00): 0.10

0.50- 2.50): 0.50

/7 V/F

1/ 9

/4 Protection

1=Transformer parameter

2=Trip

(Group 2)

( 100.0- 120.0): 100.0_

(

1.03- 1.30): 1.10

1.05- 1.30): 1.20

/7 FRQ

1/ 6

81-1 ( 45.00- 55.00): 45.00_

81-2 ( 45.00- 55.00): 45.00

/4 Protection

(Group 8)

1=Transformer parameters

2=Trip

(

40- 100):

/3 Copy groupA to B (Active group= 1)

(

8):

a-1 b-2 c-1

⎯ 190 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

a-1 b-2

/2 Binary input

1/16

1 _

BISW 1 1=Norm 2=Inv

BISW 2 1=Norm 2=Inv

BISW 3 1=Norm 2=Inv

/2 Binary output

/3 Binary output

Select BO

(IO#2)

1=IO#2

2=IO#3

( 1- 13)

Select No.= _

/4 Setting

(BO 1 of IO#2)

/5 Logic gate type & delay timer 1/ 2

1=Logic gate type & delay timer

2=Input to logic gate

Logic 1=OR 2=AND

BOTD 0=Off 1=On

1 _

/5 Input to logic gate

3/ 6

21 _

/4 Setting

1=Logic gate type & delay timer

2=Input to logic gate

(BO 12 of IO#2)

In #1 (

In #2 (

In #3 (

0 - 3071):

/3 Binary output

(IO#3)

Select BO

( 1- 10)

Select No.= _

/2 LED

Select LED

/3 Setting

1=Logic gate type & reset

2=Input to logic gate

(LED*)

/4 Logic gate type & reset

Logic 1=OR 2=AND

Reset 0=Inst 1=Latch

1/ 2

1 _

( 1- 4)

Select No.= _

/1 Test

1=Switch

3=Timer

/2 Switch

A.M.F. 0=Off 1=On

Reset 0=Off 1=On

1/ 3

1 _

/4 Input to logic gate

1/ 4

2=Binary output

4=Logic circuit

In #1(

In #2(

In #3(

0- 3071):

21 _

IECTST 0=Off 1=On

/2 Binary output

1=IO#1 2=IO#2 3=IO#3

/3 BO

(0=Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 5

/3 BO

IO#1 TP-1:

IO#1 TP-2:

IO#1 TP-3:

1 _

Keep pressing 1 to operate.

Press CANCEL to cancel.

/3 BO

(0=Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 10

IO#3 BO1:

IO#3 BO2:

IO#3 BO3:

1 _

/2 Timer

1/ 1

/2 Timer

Timer(

1 - 100):

1 _

Press ENTER to operate.

Press CANCEL to cancel.

/2 Timer

Operating . . .

Press END to reset.

Press CANCEL to cancel.

/2 Logic circuit

1/ 2

1 _

TermA(

TermB(

0 - 3071):

⎯ 191 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

MODE

1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED

ITEMS

NORMAL

(DISPLAY OFF)

2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN

1=RECORD

PRESS ANY

BUTTON

( DISPLAY ON )

EXCEPT FOR

"VIEW" AND

"RESET"

1=FAULT RECORD

VIEW

2=EVENT RECORD

3=DISTURBANCE RECORD

METERING 1

( DISPLAY ON )

2=STATUS

RESET

VIEW

1=METERING

2=BINARY INPUT&OUTPUT

3=RELAY ELELMENT

AUTO-

MODE 1

TRIP OUTPUT

ISSUED !

METERING 2

( DISPLAY ON )

4=TIME SYNC SOURCE

5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

VIEW

RESET

3=SETTING

(VIEW)

TRIP

( LED ON )

1=RELAY VERSION

2=DESCRIPTION

LATEST FAULT *

( DISPLAY ON )

AUTO-

MODE 2

RELAY

FAILED !

3=RSM COMMUNICATION

4=RECORD

5=STATUS

VIEW

RESET

ALARM

( LED ON )

6=PROTECTION

7=BINARY INPUT

8=BINARY OUTPUT

9=LED

AUTO SUPERVISON *

( DISPLAY ON )

*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO

SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS

DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA

IS STORED

4=SETTING

(CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu

VIEW

RESET

5=TEST

1=SWITCH

2=BINARY OUTPUT

3=TIMER

4=LOGIC CIRCUIT

⎯ 192 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix F

Case Outline

• Flush Mount Type

• Rack Mount Type

⎯ 193 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

266

254

276.2

Front View

Side view

4-φ5.5

190.5

260

34.75

6.2

223

235.4

Rear view

Panel cut-out

TB3/TB4 TB2

A1 B1

TB2-TB4:

M3.5 Ring

terminal

TB1:

TB1

M3.5 Ring

terminal

A10 B10

A18 B18

Terminal block

Case Outline : Flush Mount Type

⎯ 194 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Attachment kit

(top bar)

Attachment kit

(large bracket)

Attachment kit

(small bracket)

Top View

4 HOLES - 6.8x10.3

TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

GRT100

201B-11-10

100/110/115/120V

465.1

483.0

Front View

Case Outline: Rack Mount Type

⎯ 195 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

247.8

19.4

18.8

(a) Large Bracket

(b) Small Bracket

216

Parts

(a)

(b)

(c)

1 Large bracket, 5 Round head screws with spring washers and washers (M4x10)

1 Small bracket, 3 Countersunk head screws (M4x6)

2 Bars, 4 Countersunk head screws (M3x8)

Dimensions of Attachment Kit EP-101

⎯ 196 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

How to Mount Attachment Kit for Rack-Mounting

Caution: Be careful that the relay modules or terminal blocks, etc., are not damage while mounting.

Tighten screws to the specified torque according to the size of screw.

Step 1.

Remove case cover.

GPS ALARM

SYNC. ALARM

MODE 2A

Right bracket

Seal

Left bracket

Step 2.

Screw

Remove the left and right brackets by

unscrewing the three screws respectively,

then remove two screws on left side of the

GPS ALARM

relay.

SYNC. ALARM

MODE 2A

And then, remove four seals on the top

and bottom of the relay.

Seal

Step 3

Top bar

Mount the small bracket by screwing three

countersunk head screws(M4x6) and apply

adhesives to the screws to prevent them

from loosening.

Mount the large bracket by five round head

screws(M4x10) with washer and spring

GPS ALARM

SYNC. ALARM

washer.

MODE 2A

And then, mount the top and bottom bars by

two countersunk head screws(M3x8)

respectively.

Small bracket

Large bracket

Bottom bar

Step 4

Completed.

GPS ALARM

SYNC. ALARM

MODE 2A

⎯ 197 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 198 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix G

External Connections

⎯ 199 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TB3-A2

BO1

BO2

BO3

TB1 -1

BO4

BO5

IO#2

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

A10

B10

A11

(∗1)

(CASE EARTH)

B11

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

(+)

A13

B13

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

BO13

TB4 -A4

FAIL

A12

B12

BI1

BI2

RELAY FAILURE

MECHANICAL

TRIP

BI3

TB3-A18

BI4

COM-A

COM-B

INDICATION RESET

B18

A17

RS485 I/F

BI5

BI6

IO#1

BI7

B17

A16

BI8

BI9

B16

BI10

BI11

BI12

BI13

Ethernet LAN I/F

RJ45

(100Base-TX:option)

A10

Opt. interface for

IEC103(option)

B11

(-)

TB3-A14

Ethernet LAN I/F

BI14

BI15

BI16

B14

A15

EVENT

(100Base-FX:option)

IO#2

IO module

(-)

B15

IRIG-B

IO#1

IO#2

IO1

IO2

TB4-A1

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

IO#2

CN1

IRIG-B

TB4

TB3

RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.

≥1

TB1

TB4 -A16

+5Vdc

TRIP-3

TRIP-4

TRIP-5

A12

(+)

DC-DC

SUPPLY

B16

A17

B17

A18

B18

A15

(-)

A18

B18

B12

A13

IO#2

IO#1

VCT

(∗1)These connections are connected

(∗1)

by short-links before shipment.

B13

Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

B15

(CASE EARTH)

Typical External Connection of Model 101D

⎯ 200 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TB2-A1

TB3-A2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO1

BO2

BO3

TB1 -1

BO4

BO5

IO#2

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

A10

B10

A11

(∗1)

(CASE EARTH)

A10

B10

B11

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

(+)

A13

B13

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

IO#3

BO13

TB4 -A4

BI1

BI2

FAIL

A12

B12

RELAY FAILURE

MECHANICAL

TRIP

BI3

TB3-A18

BI4

COM-A

COM-B

INDICATION RESET

BI5

B18

A17

RS485 I/F

BI6

BI7

B17

A16

IO#1

BI8

BI9

B16

BI10

BI11

BI12

BI13

Ethernet LAN I/F

RJ45

(100Base-TX:option)

A10

Opt. interface for

IEC103(option)

IO module

B11

TB3-A14

(-)

BI14

BI15

BI16

Ethernet LAN I/F

IO#1

IO#2

IO#3

IO1

IO2

IO3

B14

A15

EVENT

(100Base-FX:option)

IO#2

(-)

B15

IRIG-B

TB4-A1

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

IO#2

CN1

TB4

TB3 TB2

IRIG-B

RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.

≥1

TB1

TB4 -A16

+5Vdc

TRIP-3

TRIP-4

TRIP-5

A10

B10

A12

(+)

B16

DC-DC

SUPPLY

IO#3

A17

B17

A18

B18

A15

B15

(-)

B12

A13

A18

B18

IO#2

IO#1

(∗1)These connections are connected

by short-links before shipment.

(∗1)

VCT

B13

Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

(CASE EARTH)

Typical External Connection of Model 102D

⎯ 201 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TB1 -1

TB3-A2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

IO#2

BO10

BO11

BO12

A10

(∗1)

B10

A11

B11

(CASE EARTH)

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

(+)

A13

B13

[Default Setting]

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

BO13

TB4 -A4

BI1

BI2

FAIL

A12

B12

EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP

INDICATION RESET

RELAY FAILURE

BI3

BI4

BI5

TB3-A18

COM-A

COM-B

BI6

BI7

B18

A17

IO#1

RS485 I/F

BI8

B17

A16

BI9

BI10

BI11

BI12

BI13

B16

Ethernet LAN I/F

RJ45

A10

(100Base-TX:option)

Opt. interface for

IEC103(option)

B11

TB3-A14

(-)

IO module

BI14

B14

A15

Ethernet LAN I/F

EVENT

IO#1

IO#2

IO1

IO2

BI15

BI16

IO#2

(100Base-FX:option)

B15

IRIG-B

CN1

IRIG-B

TB4

TB3

TB4-A1

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

IO#2

TB1

RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.

≧1

TRIP-3

TRIP-4

A18

B18

TB4 -A16

A12

+5Vdc

IO#2

IO#1

B16

A17

VCT

(+)

SUPPLY

DC-DC

B12

A13

Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

(-)

B17

A18

(∗1)These connections are connected

by short-bars before shipment.

(∗1)

B18

A15

B15

TRIP-5

B13

(CASE EARTH)

Typical External Connection of Model 201D

⎯ 202 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TB2-A1

TB3-A2

TB1 -1

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

IO#2

BO10

BO11

BO12

A10

B10

A11

B11

(∗1)

(CASE EARTH)

A10

B10

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

(+)

A13

B13

[Default Setting]

IO#3

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

BO13

TB4 -A4

BI1

BI2

FAIL

A12

B12

EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP

INDICATION RESET

RELAY FAILURE

BI3

BI4

BI5

TB3-A18

COM-A

COM-B

B18

A17

RS485 I/F

BI6

BI7

BI8

BI9

IO#1

B17

A16

BI10

BI11

BI12

BI13

B16

Ethernet LAN I/F

RJ45

A10

(100Base-TX:option)

Opt. interface for

IEC103(option)

B11

TB3-A14

IO module

(-)

BI14

IO#1

IO#2

IO#3

IO1

IO2

IO3

B14

A15

Ethernet LAN I/F

EVENT

BI15

BI16

IO#2

(100Base-FX:option)

B15

IRIG-B

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

TB4-A1

CN1

IRIG-B

_A1TB4

TB3 TB2_B1

IO#2

TB1

RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.

B10

≧1

IO#3

TRIP-3

TRIP-4

TB4 -A16

A12

+5Vdc

A18

B16

A17

(+)

SUPPLY

DC-DC

IO#2

IO#1

VCT

B12

A13

(-)

B17

A18

Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

(∗1)These connections are connected

by short-bars before shipment.

(∗1)

B18

A15

B15

TRIP-5

B13

(CASE EARTH)

Typical External Connection of Model 202D

⎯ 203 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TB1 -1

TB3-A2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

IO#2

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

A10

B10

A11

(∗1)

(CASE EARTH)

(+)

TB4 -B4

[Default Setting]

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

B11

BI1

BI2

BI3

BI4

BI5

BI6

BI7

BI8

BI9

BI10

BI11

BI12

A13

B13

EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

BO13

FAIL

A12

B12

RELAY FAILURE

INDICATION RESET

PROTECTION BLOCK

TB3-A18

COM-A

COM-B

B10

IO#1

B18

A17

A10

B11

A11

B12

A12

B13

A13

B14

A14

B15

A15

RS485 I/F

B17

A16

B16

Ethernet LAN I/F

RJ45

(100Base-TX:option)

Opt. interface for

IEC103(option)

(-)

IO module

TB3 –A14

Ethernet LAN I/F

BI14

BI15

BI16

(100Base-FX:option)

IO#1

IO#2

IO8

IO2

B14

A15

EVENT

IO#2

IRIG-B

(+)

B15

(-)

TB4- A3

CN1

IRIG-B

_A1TB4

TB3

TP-1

IO#1

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

TRIP-3

RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.

TP-2

TP-3

TB1

≧1

TB4 -A16

(+)

+5Vdc

SUPPLY

B16

A17

(∗)

DC-DC

A18

IO#2

(-)

IO#1

VCT

(∗)

B17

A18

B18

Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

(∗)

(∗)This connection is connected by

short bar before shipment.

CASE EARTH

Typical External Connection of Model 203D

⎯ 204 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TB1 -1

TB2-A1

TB3-A2

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

IO#2

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

A10

(∗1)

B10

A11

B11

(CASE EARTH)

A10

B10

(+)

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

TB4 -B4

[Default Setting]

BI1

BI2

BI3

BI4

BI5

BI6

BI7

BI8

BI9

BI10

BI11

BI12

A13

B13

(HIGH SPEED

RELAY)

BO13

EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP

IO#3

FAIL

A12

B12

RELAY FAILURE

INDICATION RESET

PROTECTION BLOCK

TB3-A18

COM-A

COM-B

B18

A17

RS485 I/F

B10

IO#1

A10

B11

A11

B12

A12

B13

A13

B14

A14

B15

A15

B17

A16

B16

Ethernet LAN I/F

RJ45

(100Base-TX:option)

Opt. interface for

IEC103(option)

(-)

Ethernet LAN I/F

IO module

TB3 –A14

(100Base-FX:option)

BI14

BI15

BI16

IO#1

IO#2

IO#3

IO8

IO2

B14

EVENT

IO#2

IRIG-B

(+)

A15

(-)

IO3

TB4- A3

TP-1

CN1

_A1TB4

TB3 TB2_B1

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

TRIP-3

IO#1

RELAY FAIL.

DD FAIL.

IRIG-B

≧1

TP-2

TP-3

TB4 -A16

(+)

(∗)

TB1

+5Vdc

SUPPLY

B16

B10

DC-DC

A17

B17

A18

B18

IO#3

(-)

(∗)

A18

(∗)

IO#2

IO#1

VCT

(∗)This connection is connected by

short bar before shipment.

Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)

CASE EARTH

Typical External Connection of Model 204D

⎯ 205 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 206 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix H

Relay Setting Sheet

1. Relay Identification

2. Contacts Setting

3. Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

⎯ 207 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Relay Setting Sheets

1. Relay Identification

Date:

Relay type

Serial Number

CT rating

Frequency

VT rating

dc supply voltage

Password

Active setting group

2. Contacts Setting

(1) IO#2 BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BO11

BO12

BO13

(2) IO#3 BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

⎯ 208 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3. Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

User

setting

Range

World wide

ENA

3-Winding

№

Name

Units

Contents

2-Winding

101D 102D

3-Winding

201D 202D

5A rating

1A rating

203D

204D

Active group

1CT

2CT

3CT

1nCT

2nCT

3nCT

1 - 8

Active setting group

CT ratio

ditto

VT ratio

2000

400

Beta

3POR

－

1 - 20000

2000

400

2000

400

Beta

3POR

Phase matching

DIFTPMD

Alpha - Beta

3POR - 2PAND - 1P

3POR - 1P

1I0 - 2I0

1I0 - 2I0 - 3I0

1I0 - 2I0

Phase angle matching

DIF trip mode

1REF

2REF

Transformer type for REF

ditto

1I0

－

1I0

1I0 - 2I0 - 3I0

3REF

ditto

－

Directional checking

function of REF

REF_DEF

Off - On

Off

M1OCI

M2OCI

M3OCI

M1EFI

M2EFI

M3EFI

L/O

2F-LOCK

5F-LOCK

DIF1

Long - Std - Very - Ext

Off - On

OCI back-up trip

ditto

EFI back-up trip

ditto

Trip signal lock out

2F restraint

5F restraint

Current differential trip

ditto

Restricted earth fault trip

ditto

OC trip

ditto

OCI trip

ditto

EF trip

ditto

Std

Off

－

Std

Off

Off - On

DIF2

DIF3

DIF4

DIF5

Off

1REF1

1REF2

1REF3

1REF4

1REF5

1OC1

1OC2

1OC3

1OC4

1OC5

1OCI1

1OCI2

1OCI3

1OCI4

1OCI5

1EF1

Off

1EF2

1EF3

1EF4

1EF5

ditto

EFI trip

ditto

1EFI1

1EFI2

1EFI3

1EFI4

1EFI5

2REF1

2REF2

2REF3

2REF4

2REF5

2OC1

2OC2

2OC3

2OC4

2OC5

2OCI1

2OCI2

2OCI3

2OCI4

2OCI5

2EF1

Off

ditto

Restricted earth fault trip

ditto

OC trip

ditto

OCI trip

ditto

EF trip

ditto

Off

2EF2

2EF3

2EF4

2EF5

Off - On

⎯ 209 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Def ault Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

World wide

Range

ENA

3-Winding

203D 204D

User

№

Name

Units

Contents

setting

2-Winding

101D 102D

3-Winding

201D 202D

5A rating

1A rating

2EFI1

2EFI2

2EFI3

2EFI4

2EFI5

3REF1

3REF2

3REF3

3REF4

3REF5

3OC1

3OC2

3OC3

3OC4

3OC5

3OCI1

3OCI2

3OCI3

3OCI4

3OCI5

3EF1

Of f - On

EFI trip

ditto

Of f

－

ditto

Of f

ditto

Restricted earth f ault trip

Of f

ditto

OC trip

Of f

ditto

OCI trip

Of f

ditto

EF trip

Of f

3EF2

ditto

3EF3

ditto

3EF4

ditto

3EF5

ditto

3EFI1

3EFI2

3EFI3

3EFI4

3EFI5

FRQ-UF1

FRQ-UF2

FRQ1

FRQ2

FRQ3

FRQ4

FRQ5

FRQA

V/F1

EFI trip

Of f

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

ditto

FRQ trip

ditto

Of f

ditto

Of f

ditto

V/F trip

V/F2

ditto

V/F3

ditto

V/F4

ditto

Of f

V/F5

ditto

V/FA

ditto

THR1

THR2

THR3

THR4

THR5

THRA

M.T1-1

M.T1-2

M.T1-3

M.T1-4

M.T1-5

M.T2-1

M.T2-2

M.T2-3

M.T2-4

M.T2-5

M.T3-1

M.T3-2

M.T3-3

M.T3-4

M.T3-5

M.T4-1

M.T4-2

M.T4-3

M.T4-4

M.T4-5

SVCNT

THR trip

ditto

Of f

ditto

Mechanical trip1

ditto

Of f

ditto

Of f

ditto

Mechanical trip2

ditto

Of f

ditto

Mechanical trip3

ditto

Of f

ditto

Mechanical trip4

ditto

Of f

ditto

ALM&BLK - ALM

Super visor control

DIF output blocked by CT

saturation

ALM&BLK

145

CTSEN

Of f - On

Of f

－

⎯ 210 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

World wide ENA

3-Winding

203D 204D

User

setting

Range

№

Name

Units

Contents

2-Winding

101D 102D

3-Winding

201D 202D

5A rating

1A rating

Minimum operating

current

% slope of small current

region

% slope of large current

region

Break point of DIF

characteristic

CT ratio

ditto

Phase angle

ditto

Primary winding

Secondary winding

Phase angel(Secondary)

Tertiary winding

Phase angle(Tertiary)

2f restraint

146 DIFT

147

0.10 - 1.00

10 - 100

0.30

100

200

1.00

0.30

100

200

1.00

148

10 - 200

149

1.00 - 20.00

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

kct1

kct2

kct3

yd_p

yd_s

vec_s

yd_t

vec_t

k2f

0.05 - 50.00

0 - 11

1 - 2

0 - 11

1 - 2

－

1.00

0 - 11

10 - 50

10 - 100

2.00 - 20.00

2.00

k5f

5f restraint

pu HOC operaing current

Minimum sensitivity for

1REF

164 REF

1ik

0.05 - 0.50

0.50

165

166

167

168

169

1kct1

1kct2

1kct3

1p2

1.00 - 50.00

50 - 100

－

CT ratio for 1REF

ditto

1.00

100

1.00

Percent slope for 1REF

100

1.00

1kp

0.50 - 2.00

pu DF2 sensitivity

1.00

Minimum sensitivity for

2REF

170

2ik

0.05 - 0.50

0.50

171

172

173

174

175

2kct1

2kct2

2kct3

2p2

1.00 - 50.00

50 - 100

－

CT ratio for 2REF

ditto

1.00

100

1.00

0.50

Percent slope for 2REF

100

1.00

2kp

0.50 - 2.00

pu DF2 sensitivity

1.00

Minimum sensitivity for

3REF

176

3ik

0.05 - 0.50

0.50

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185 OC

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

3kct1

3kct2

3kct3

3p2

1.00 - 50.00

50 - 100

－

CT ratio for 3REF

ditto

1.00

100

1.00

100

Percent slope for 3REF

3kp

0.50 - 2.00

0.00 - 10.00

0.10 - 20.00

0.00 - 10.00

0.10 - 5.00

pu DF2 sensitivity

1.00

0.00

2.00

1.00

T1REF

T2REF

T3REF

1OC

2OC

3OC

T1OC

T2OC

T3OC

1OCI

2OCI

3OCI

1REF delay trip timer

2REF delay trip timer

3REF delay trip timer

0.00

2.00

1.00

pu OC element

pu ditto

2.00

OC delay trip timer

ditto

1.00

pu OCI element

pu ditto

1.00

OCI delayed tripping

194

T1OCI

0.05 - 1.00

1.00

－

timer

ditto

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

T2OCI

T3OCI

1EF

2EF

3EF

T1EF

T2EF

T3EF

1EFI

2EFI

3EFI

0.05 - 1.00

0.10 - 20.00

0.00 - 10.00

0.10 - 5.00

－

1.00

2.00

1.00

2.00

1.00

pu EF element

pu ditto

2.00

EF delay trip timer

ditto

1.00

pu EFI element

pu ditto

pu dittp

1.00

206

T1EFI

0.05 - 1.00

EFI delayed tripping timer

1.00

－

207

208

209 THR

210

211

T2EFI

T3EFI

0.05 - 1.00

0.5 - 500.0

0.10 - 4.00

0.50 - 2.50

0.00 - 1.00

0 - 10

－

ditto

1.00

60.0

1.30

1.00

0.00

1.00

min Time constant

Constant

pu Basic current

pu Pre-load current

min Time for alarming

60.0

1.30

1.00

0.00

－

212

213

⎯ 211 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Def ault Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

World wide

Range

ENA

3-Winding

203D 204D

User

№

Name

Units

Contents

setting

2-Winding

101D 102D

3-Winding

201D 202D

5A rating

1A rating

214

215

216

217

V/F

100.0 - 120.0

1.03 - 1.30

1.05 - 1.30

1.10 - 1.40

Voltage

100.0

1.03

1.05

1.40

100.0

1.03

1.05

1.40

Alarm lev el

Low lev el

High lev el

Inv erce time delay f or

218

219

1 - 600

600

high lev el

Inv erce time delay f ir low

lev el

Radiant heat time

220

221

222

60 - 3600

1 - 600

250

TVFH

TVFA

Delay time f or high lev el

1 - 600

Delay time f or alarm level

Frequency-1 in 50Hz

223 FRQ

81-1

81-2

45.00 - 55.00

54.00 - 66.00

45.00 - 55.00

49.00

59.00

48.00

49.00

59.00

48.00

rating

Frequency-1 in 60Hz

rating

Frequency-2 in 50Hz

224

rating

Frequency-2 in 60Hz

54.00 - 66.00

40 - 100

58.00

rating

Voltage

225

226

TRIP delay timer f or low

TFRQL

0.00 - 60.00

10.0

lev el

TRIP delay timer f or high

227

228

TFRQH

TFRQA

0.00 - 60.00

10.0

lev el

TRIP delay timer f or alarm

lev el

Binary input

ditto

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

BISW 1

BISW 2

Norm - Inv

OR - AND

Inst - Latch

0 - 3071

Norm

Inst

Norm

－

BISW 3

BISW 4

BISW 5

BISW 6

BISW 7

BISW 8

BISW 9

BISW 10

BISW 11

BISW 12

BISW 13

BISW 14

BISW 15

BISW 16

ditto

Norm

Inst

281

ditto

245 LED1

246

Logic

Reset

In #1

In #2

In #3

In #4

Logic

Reset

In #1

In #2

In #3

In #4

Logic

Reset

In #1

In #2

In #3

In #4

Logic

Reset

In #1

In #2

In #3

In #4

Conf igurable LEDs

247

248

0 - 3071

249

0 - 3071

250

0 - 3071

251 LED2

252

OR - AND

Inst - Latch

0 - 3071

Inst

291

Conf igurable LEDs

253

254

0 - 3071

255

0 - 3071

256

0 - 3071

257 LED3

258

OR - AND

Inst - Latch

0 - 3071

Inst

298

Conf igurable LEDs

259

260

0 - 3071

261

0 - 3071

262

0 - 3071

263 LED4

264

OR - AND

Inst - Latch

0 - 3071

Inst

Conf igurable LEDs

265

266

0 - 3071

267

0 - 3071

268

0 - 3071

269

270

271

Plant name

Description

Specif ied by user

ditto

Plant name

no-name

no-data

no-name

no-data

Memorandum f or user

Relay ID No. f or RSM

Station address f or

IEC103

HDLC

1 - 32

272

273

IEC

0 - 254

－

SYADJ

-9999 - 9999

Time sync. Compensation

IP Address of CH#1

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

IP1-1

IP1-2

0 - 254

0 - 255

0 - 254

192

168

192

168

－

IP1-3

IP1-4

172

255

172

255

SM1-1

SM1-2

SM1-3

SM1-4

GW1-1

GW1-2

GW1-3

GW1-4

Subnet Mask of CH#1

Gateway Address of

CH#1

192

168

192

168

⎯ 212 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

User

setting

Range

World wide

ENA

3-Winding

№

Name

Units

Contents

2-Winding

101D 102D

3-Winding

201D 202D

5A rating

1A rating

203D

204D

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

323

IP2-1

IP2-2

IP2-3

0 - 254

0 - 255

0 - 254

0 - 1

－

IP Address of CH#2

192

168

173

255

192

168

192

168

173

255

192

168

IP2-4

SM2-1

SM2-2

SM2-3

SM2-4

GW2-1

GW2-2

GW2-3

GW2-4

SI1-1

SI1-2

SI1-3

SI1-4

SI2-1

SI2-2

SI2-3

SI2-4

SI3-1

SI3-2

SI3-3

SI3-4

SI4-1

Subnet Mask of CH#2

Gateway Address of

CH#2

SNTP Server1 Address

SNTP Server2 Address

SNTP Server3 Address

SNTP Server4 Address

SI4-2

SI4-3

SI4-4

SNTP operation mode (foecibly synchronising or not)

GOOSE message interval

Ping check addrs port#1

SMODE

GOINT

PG1-1

PG1-2

PG1-3

PG1-4

PG2-1

PG2-2

PG2-3

PG2-4

1 - 60

0 - 254

－

Ping check addrs port#2

CH#1 Communication

protocol

RS-232C baud rate

IEC60870-5-103 baud

rate

324

325

326

PRTCL1

232C

HDLC - IEC103

9.6 - 19.2 - 38.4 - 57.6

9.6 - 19.2

HDLC

9.6

HDLC

9.6

－

IECBR

19.2

327

328

329

330

331

332

IECBLK

850BLK

850AUT

TSTMOD

GSECHK

PINGCHK

Normal - Blocked

Off - On

－

Monitor direction blocked

IEC61850 Block

IEC61850 Authorize

IEC61850 Test mode

GOOSE receive check

Ping check

Normal

Off

Normal

Off

Off - On

Off

Phase indication of Fault

recording

Number of bi-trigger

333 Phase mode

Operating - Fault

0 - 128

Operating

100

Operating

100

－

334

BITRN

(on/off) events

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

352

353

354

355

356

357

Time

1OCPS

2OCPS

3OCPS

1OCPG

2OCPG

3OCPG

TRIP1

TRIP2

TRIP3

TRIP4

TRIP5

1OCPS

2OCPS

3OCPS

1OCPG

2OCPG

3OCPG

0.1 - 3.0

0.10 - 20.00

0.05 - 20.00

Off - On

Disturbance record

OC element for

disturbance recorder

1.0

1.00

1.0

1.00

pu initiation

1.00

－

1.00

Disturbance trigger

ditto

Metering

Time

Off

Primary

Off

EVENT1

EVENT2

EVENT3

Off - On

Primary

Off

358 Display value

Primary - Secondary

Off - IRIG - RSM - IEC - SNTP

-12 - +12

359

360

361

Time sync

GMT

GMTm

hrs Time

min Time

-59 - +59

⎯ 213 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Event record default setting

Default setting

Signal name

Model

No.

Name

Range

Unit

Contents

Sig. NO.

type

101D 102D 201D 201D 203D 204D

EV1

EV2

0 - 3071

Event record signal

ditto

1536

Mec.Trip1

Mec.Trip2

Mec.Trip3

Mec.Trip4

Trip

On/Off

－

1537

EV3

1538

EV4

1539

EV5

314

EV6

1540

Ind.reset

Event1

EV7

1552

EV8

1553

Event2

EV9

1554

Event3

EV10

EV11

EV12

EV13

EV14

EV15

EV16

EV17

EV18

EV19

EV20

EV21

EV22

EV23

EV24

EV25

EV26

EV27

EV28

EV29

EV30

EV31

EV32

EV33

EV34

EV35

EV36

EV37

EV38

EV39

EV40

EV41

EV42

EV43

EV44

EV45

EV46

EV47

EV48

EV49

EV50

EV51

EV52

EV53

EV54

EV55

EV56

EV57

EV58

EV59

EV60

EV61

EV62

EV63

EV64

1251

Relayfail

CT1 err

CT2 err

CT3 err

CT4 err

1267

1268

1269

1270

1258

1438

Relayfail-A

Data lost

⎯ 214 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Event record default setting

Default setting

Signal name

Model

No.

Name

Range

Unit

Contents

Sig. NO.

type

On/Off

101D 102D 201D 201D 203D 204D

EV65

EV66

EV67

EV68

EV69

EV70

EV71

EV72

EV73

EV74

EV75

EV76

EV77

EV78

EV79

EV80

EV81

EV82

EV83

EV84

EV85

EV86

EV87

EV88

EV89

EV90

EV91

EV92

EV93

EV94

EV95

EV96

EV97

EV98

EV99

EV100

EV101

EV102

EV103

EV104

EV105

EV106

EV107

EV108

EV109

EV110

EV111

EV112

EV113

EV114

EV115

EV116

EV117

EV118

EV119

EV120

EV121

EV122

EV123

EV124

EV125

EV126

EV127

EV128

0 - 3071

ditto

－

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

1243

1244

1245

1246

1247

1248

1249

1250

1448

1449

1450

SET.GROUP1

SET.GROUP2

SET.GROUP3

SET.GROUP4

SET.GROUP5

SET.GROUP6

SET.GROUP7

SET.GROUP8

Sys. Set change

Rly. Set change

Grp. Set change

1445

PLC data CHG

1409

1435

LED RST

F.record_CLR

1436

1437

E.record_CLR

D.record_CLR

⎯ 215 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Disturbance record default setting

Default setting

Model

No. Name

Range

Unit

Contents

101D

102D

201D

202D

203D

204D

Signal No. Signal name

SIG1

SIG2

SIG3

SIG4

SIG5

SIG6

SIG7

SIG8

SIG9

0 - 3071

disturbance record triger

284

291

298

305

312

330

331

122

123

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

361

TRIP-1

TRIP-2

TRIP-3

TRIP-4

TRIP-5

DIFT

HOC

－

ditto

10 SIG10 0 - 3071

11 SIG11 0 - 3071

12 SIG12 0 - 3071

13 SIG13 0 - 3071

14 SIG14 0 - 3071

15 SIG15 0 - 3071

16 SIG16 0 - 3071

17 SIG17 0 - 3071

18 SIG18 0 - 3071

19 SIG19 0 - 3071

20 SIG20 0 - 3071

21 SIG21 0 - 3071

22 SIG22 0 - 3071

23 SIG23 0 - 3071

24 SIG24 0 - 3071

25 SIG25 0 - 3071

26 SIG26 0 - 3071

27 SIG27 0 - 3071

28 SIG28 0 - 3071

29 SIG29 0 - 3071

30 SIG30 0 - 3071

31 SIG31 0 - 3071

32 SIG32 0 - 3071

1REF

2REF

3REF

1OC

2OC

3OC

4OC

1OCI

2OCI

3OCI

4OCI

1EF

2EF

3EF

1EFI

2EFI

3EFI

FRQ

V/F

THR

Mec.tirp

⎯ 216 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PLC default setting

Output

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

On One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Signal

Turn

Off

None

90 User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1536 EXT_MEC.TP1

1537 EXT_MEC.TP2

1538 EXT_MEC.TP3

1539 EXT_MEC.TP4

1540 IND.RESET

1541

[513]BI1_COMMAND

[514]BI2_COMMAND

[515]BI3_COMMAND

[516]BI4_COMMAND

[517]BI5_COMMAND

1542

1543

1544

1545

1546

1547

1548

1549

1550

1551

1552 EVENT1

1553 EVENT2

1554 EVENT3

1555

[526]BI14_COMMAND

[527]BI15_COMMAND

[528]BI16_COMMAND

1556

1557

1558

1559

1560

1561

1562

1563

1564

1565

1566

1567

1568 PROT_BLOCK

1569 DIF_BLOCK

1570 1REF_BLOCK

1571 1OC_BLOCK

1572 1OCI_BLOCK

1573 1EF_BLOCK

1574 1EFI_BLOCK

1575 2REF_BLOCK

1576 2OC_BLOCK

1577 2OCI_BLOCK

1578 2EF_BLOCK

1579 2EFI_BLOCK

1580 3REF_BLOCK

1581 3OC_BLOCK

1582 3OCI_BLOCK

1583 3EF_BLOCK

1584 3EFI_BLOCK

1585 4OC_BLOCK

1586 4OCI_BLOCK

1587 FRQ_BLOCK

1588 FRQ-A_BLOCK

1589 V/F_BLOCK

1590 V/F-A_BLOCK

1591 THR_BLOCK

1592 THR-A_BLOCK

1593 MEC.TP1_BLOCK

1594 MEC.TP2_BLOCK

1595 MEC.TP3_BLOCK

1596 MEC.TP4_BLOCK

1597

[518]BI6_COMMAND

1598

1599

⎯ 217 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

Delay Delay Shot

1600 TP1_DELAY

[315]TP1

[316]TP2

[317]TP3

[318]TP4

[319]TP5

200

1601 TP2_DELAY

1602 TP3_DELAY

1603 TP4_DELAY

1604 TP5_DELAY

1605

1606

1607

1608

1609

1610

1611

1612

1613

1614

1615

1616 DIF-A_BLOCK

1617 DIF-B_BLOCK

1618 DIF-C_BLOCK

1619

1620

1621

1622

1623

1624

1625

1626

1627

1628

1629

1630

1631

1632

1633

1634

1635

1636

1637

1638

1639

1640

1641

1642

1643

1644

1645

1646

1647

1648

1649

1650

1651

1652

1653

1654

1655

1656

1657

1658

1659

1660

1661

1662

1663

⎯ 218 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1664

1665

1666

1667

1668

1669

1670

1671

1672

1673

1674

1675

1676

1677

1678

1679

1680

1681

1682

1683

1684

1685

1686

1687

1688

1689

1690

1691

1692

1693

1694

1695

1696

1697

1698

1699

1700

1701

1702

1703

1704

1705

1706

1707

1708

1709

1710

1711

1712

1713

1714

1715

1716

1717

1718

1719

1720

1721

1722

1723

1724

1725

1726

1727

⎯ 219 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1728

1729

1730

1731

1732

1733

1734

1735

1736

1737

1738

1739

1740

1741

1742

1743

1744

1745

1746

1747

1748

1749

1750

1751

1752

1753

1754

1755

1756

1757

1758

1759

1760

1761

1762

1763

1764

1765

1766

1767

1768

1769

1770

1771

1772

1773

1774

1775

1776

1777

1778

1779

1780

1781

1782

1783

1784

1785

1786

1787

1788

1789

1790

1791

⎯ 220 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1792 IO#1-TP1

1793 IO#1-TP2

1794 IO#1-TP3

1795 IO#1-TP4

1796 IO#1-TP5

1797

[284]TRIP-1

[291]TRIP-2

[298]TRIP-3

[305]TRIP-4

[312]TRIP-5

1798

1799

1800

1801

1802

1803

1804

1805

1806

1807

1808

1809

1810

1811

1812

1813

1814

1815

1816

1817

1818

1819

1820

1821

1822

1823

1824

1825

1826

1827

1828

1829

1830

1831

1832

1833

1834

1835

1836

1837

1838

1839

1840

1841

1842

1843

1844

1845

1846

1847

1848

1849

1850

1851

1852

1853

1854

1855

⎯ 221 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1856

1857

1858

1859

1860

1861

1862

1863

1864

1865

1866

1867

1868

1869

1870

1871

1872

1873

1874

1875

1876

1877

1878

1879

1880

1881

1882

1883

1884

1885

1886

1887

1888

1889

1890

1891

1892

1893

1894

1895

1896

1897

1898

1899

1900

1901

1902

1903

1904

1905

1906

1907

1908

1909

1910

1911

1912

1913

1914

1915

1916

1917

1918

1919

⎯ 222 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1920

1921

1922

1923

1924

1925

1926

1927

1928

1929

1930

1931

1932

1933

1934

1935

1936

1937

1938

1939

1940

1941

1942

1943

1944

1945

1946

1947

1948

1949

1950

1951

1952

1953

1954

1955

1956

1957

1958

1959

1960

1961

1962

1963

1964

1965

1966

1967

1968

1969

1970

1971

1972

1973

1974

1975

1976

1977

1978

1979

1980

1981

1982

1983

⎯ 223 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

1984

1985

1986

1987

1988

1989

1990

1991

1992

1993

1994

1995

1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

2023

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2029

2030

2031

2032

2033

2034

2035

2036

2037

2038

2039

2040

2041

2042

2043

2044

2045

2046

2047

⎯ 224 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2048

2049

2050

2051

2052

2053

2054

2055

2056

2057

2058

2059

2060

2061

2062

2063

2064

2065

2066

2067

2068

2069

2070

2071

2072

2073

2074

2075

2076

2077

2078

2079

2080

2081

2082

2083

2084

2085

2086

2087

2088

2089

2090

2091

2092

2093

2094

2095

2096

2097

2098

2099

2100

2101

2102

2103

2104

2105

2106

2107

2108

2109

2110

2111

⎯ 225 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2112

2113

2114

2115

2116

2117

2118

2119

2120

2121

2122

2123

2124

2125

2126

2127

2128

2129

2130

2131

2132

2133

2134

2135

2136

2137

2138

2139

2140

2141

2142

2143

2144

2145

2146

2147

2148

2149

2150

2151

2152

2153

2154

2155

2156

2157

2158

2159

2160

2161

2162

2163

2164

2165

2166

2167

2168

2169

2170

2171

2172

2173

2174

2175

⎯ 226 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2176

2177

2178

2179

2180

2181

2182

2183

2184

2185

2186

2187

2188

2189

2190

2191

2192

2193

2194

2195

2196

2197

2198

2199

2200

2201

2202

2203

2204

2205

2206

2207

2208

2209

2210

2211

2212

2213

2214

2215

2216

2217

2218

2219

2220

2221

2222

2223

2224

2225

2226

2227

2228

2229

2230

2231

2232

2233

2234

2235

2236

2237

2238

2239

⎯ 227 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2240

2241

2242

2243

2244

2245

2246

2247

2248

2249

2250

2251

2252

2253

2254

2255

2256

2257

2258

2259

2260

2261

2262

2263

2264

2265

2266

2267

2268

2269

2270

2271

2272

2273

2274

2275

2276

2277

2278

2279

2280

2281

2282

2283

2284

2285

2286

2287

2288

2289

2290

2291

2292

2293

2294

2295

2296

2297

2298

2299

2300

2301

2302

2303

⎯ 228 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2304

2305

2306

2307

2308

2309

2310

2311

2312

2313

2314

2315

2316

2317

2318

2319

2320

2321

2322

2323

2324

2325

2326

2327

2328

2329

2330

2331

2332

2333

2334

2335

2336

2337

2338

2339

2340

2341

2342

2343

2344

2345

2346

2347

2348

2349

2350

2351

2352

2353

2354

2355

2356

2357

2358

2359

2360

2361

2362

2363

2364

2365

2366

2367

⎯ 229 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2368

2369

2370

2371

2372

2373

2374

2375

2376

2377

2378

2379

2380

2381

2382

2383

2384

2385

2386

2387

2388

2389

2390

2391

2392

2393

2394

2395

2396

2397

2398

2399

2400

2401

2402

2403

2404

2405

2406

2407

2408

2409

2410

2411

2412

2413

2414

2415

2416

2417

2418

2419

2420

2421

2422

2423

2424

2425

2426

2427

2428

2429

2430

2431

⎯ 230 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2432

2433

2434

2435

2436

2437

2438

2439

2440

2441

2442

2443

2444

2445

2446

2447

2448

2449

2450

2451

2452

2453

2454

2455

2456

2457

2458

2459

2460

2461

2462

2463

2464

2465

2466

2467

2468

2469

2470

2471

2472

2473

2474

2475

2476

2477

2478

2479

2480

2481

2482

2483

2484

2485

2486

2487

2488

2489

2490

2491

2492

2493

2494

2495

⎯ 231 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2486

2487

2488

2489

2490

2491

2492

2493

2494

2495

2496

2497

2498

2499

2500

2501

2502

2503

2504

2505

2506

2507

2508

2509

2510

2511

2512

2513

2514

2515

2516

2517

2518

2519

2520

2521

2522

2523

2524

2525

2526

2527

2528

2529

2530

2531

2532

2533

2534

2535

2536

2537

2538

2539

2540

2541

2542

2543

2544

2545

2546

2547

2548

2549

⎯ 232 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2550

2551

2552

2553

2554

2555

2556

2557

2558

2559

2560

2561

2562

2563

2564

2565

2566

2567

2568

2569

2570

2571

2572

2573

2574

2575

2576

2577

2578

2579

2580

2581

2582

2583

2584

2585

2586

2587

2588

2589

2590

2591

2592

2593

2594

2595

2596

2597

2598

2599

2600

2601

2602

2603

2604

2605

2606

2607

2608

2609

2610

2611

2612

2613

⎯ 233 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2614

2615

2616

2617

2618

2619

2620

2621

2622

2623

2624 F.RECORD1

2625 F.RECORD2

2626 F.RECORD3

2627 F.RECORD4

2628

2629

2630

2631

2632 D.RECORD1

2633 D.RECORD2

2634 D.RECORD3

2635 D.RECORD4

2636

2637

2638

2639

2640 SET.GROUP1

2641 SET.GROUP2

2642 SET.GROUP3

2643 SET.GROUP4

2644 SET.GROUP5

2645 SET.GROUP6

2646 SET.GROUP7

2647 SET.GROUP8

2648

2649

2650

2651

2652

2653

2654

2655

2656 CON_TPMD1

2657 CON_TPMD2

2658 CON_TPMD3

2659 CON_TPMD4

2660 CON_TPMD5

2661 CON_TPMD6

2662 CON_TPMD7

2663 CON_TPMD8

2664

2665

2666

2667

2668

2669

2670

2671

2672

2673

2674

2675

2676

2677

⎯ 234 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2678

2679

2680

2681

2682

2683

2684

2685

2686

2687

PROT_COM_RECV

2688 TPLED_RST_RCV

2689

2690

2691

2692

2693

2694

2695

2696

2697

2698

2699

2700

2701

2702

2703

2704

2705

2706

2707

2708

2709

2710

2711

2712

2713

2714

2715

2716

2717

2718

2719

2720

2721

2722

2723

2724

2725

2726

2727

2728

2729

2730

2731

2732

2733

2734

2735

2736

2737

2738

2739

2740

2741

⎯ 235 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

2742

2743

2744

2745

2746

2747

2748

2749

2750

2751

2752

2753

2754

2755

2756

2757

2758

2759

2760

2761

2762

2763

2764

2765

2766

2767

2768

2769

2770

2771

2772

2773

2774

2775

2776

2777

2778

2779

2780

2781

2782

2783

2784

2785

2786

2787

2788

2789

2790

2791

2792

2793

2794

2795

2796

2797

2798

2799

2800

2801

2802

2803

2804

2805

2806

2807

2808

2809

2810

2811

2812

2813

2814

2815

⎯ 236 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2816 TEMP001

2817 TEMP002

2818 TEMP003

2819 TEMP004

2820 TEMP005

2821 TEMP006

2822 TEMP007

2823 TEMP008

2824 TEMP009

2825 TEMP010

2826 TEMP011

2827 TEMP012

2828 TEMP013

2829 TEMP014

2830 TEMP015

2831 TEMP016

2832 TEMP017

2833 TEMP018

2834 TEMP019

2835 TEMP020

2836 TEMP021

2837 TEMP022

2838 TEMP023

2839 TEMP024

2840 TEMP025

2841 TEMP026

2842 TEMP027

2843 TEMP028

2844 TEMP029

2845 TEMP030

2846 TEMP031

2847 TEMP032

2848 TEMP033

2849 TEMP034

2850 TEMP035

2851 TEMP036

2852 TEMP037

2853 TEMP038

2854 TEMP039

2855 TEMP040

2856 TEMP041

2857 TEMP042

2858 TEMP043

2859 TEMP044

2860 TEMP045

2861 TEMP046

2862 TEMP047

2863 TEMP048

2864 TEMP049

2865 TEMP050

2866 TEMP051

2867 TEMP052

2868 TEMP053

2869 TEMP054

2870 TEMP055

2871 TEMP056

2872 TEMP057

2873 TEMP058

2874 TEMP059

2875 TEMP060

2876 TEMP061

2877 TEMP062

2878 TEMP063

2879 TEMP064

2880 TEMP065

⎯ 237 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

Filename: PGRT100DA000

User

Norm

Time Value

2881 TEMP066

2882 TEMP067

2883 TEMP068

2884 TEMP069

2885 TEMP070

2886 TEMP071

2887 TEMP072

2888 TEMP073

2889 TEMP074

2890 TEMP075

2891 TEMP076

2892 TEMP077

2893 TEMP078

2894 TEMP079

2895 TEMP080

2896 TEMP081

2897 TEMP082

2898 TEMP083

2899 TEMP084

2900 TEMP085

2901 TEMP086

2902 TEMP087

2903 TEMP088

2904 TEMP089

2905 TEMP090

2906 TEMP091

2907 TEMP092

2908 TEMP093

2909 TEMP094

2910 TEMP095

2911 TEMP096

2912 TEMP097

2913 TEMP098

2914 TEMP099

2915 TEMP100

2916 TEMP101

2917 TEMP102

2918 TEMP103

2919 TEMP104

2920 TEMP105

2921 TEMP106

2922 TEMP107

2923 TEMP108

2924 TEMP109

2925 TEMP110

2926 TEMP111

2927 TEMP112

2928 TEMP113

2929 TEMP114

2930 TEMP115

2931 TEMP116

2932 TEMP117

2933 TEMP118

2934 TEMP119

2935 TEMP120

2936 TEMP121

2937 TEMP122

2938 TEMP123

2939 TEMP124

2940 TEMP125

2941 TEMP126

2942 TEMP127

2943 TEMP128

2944 TEMP129

⎯ 238 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back

№

Turn

Release

Signal

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000

Norm

Time Value

2945 TEMP130

2946 TEMP131

2947 TEMP132

2948 TEMP133

2949 TEMP134

2950 TEMP135

2951 TEMP136

2952 TEMP137

2953 TEMP138

2954 TEMP139

2955 TEMP140

2956 TEMP141

2957 TEMP142

2958 TEMP143

2959 TEMP144

2960 TEMP145

2961 TEMP146

2962 TEMP147

2963 TEMP148

2964 TEMP149

2965 TEMP150

2966 TEMP151

2967 TEMP152

2968 TEMP153

2969 TEMP154

2970 TEMP155

2971 TEMP156

2972 TEMP157

2973 TEMP158

2974 TEMP159

2975 TEMP160

2976 TEMP161

2977 TEMP162

2978 TEMP163

2979 TEMP164

2980 TEMP165

2981 TEMP166

2982 TEMP167

2983 TEMP168

2984 TEMP169

2985 TEMP170

2986 TEMP171

2987 TEMP172

2988 TEMP173

2989 TEMP174

2990 TEMP175

2991 TEMP176

2992 TEMP177

2993 TEMP178

2994 TEMP179

2995 TEMP180

2996 TEMP181

2997 TEMP182

2998 TEMP183

2999 TEMP184

3000 TEMP185

3001 TEMP186

3002 TEMP187

3003 TEMP188

3004 TEMP189

3005 TEMP190

3006 TEMP191

3007 TEMP192

3008 TEMP193

⎯ 239 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Output

Signal

Timing

Cycle

Logic expression

Model 100s Model 200s

Delay Time / Flip Flop

Timer

One

Delay Delay Shot

Flip Flop

Back Release

Signal

№

Turn

Off

None

User

Filename: PGRT100DA000 Norm

Time Value

3009 TEMP194

3010 TEMP195

3011 TEMP196

3012 TEMP197

3013 TEMP198

3014 TEMP199

3015 TEMP200

3016 TEMP201

3017 TEMP202

3018 TEMP203

3019 TEMP204

3020 TEMP205

3021 TEMP206

3022 TEMP207

3023 TEMP208

3024 TEMP209

3025 TEMP210

3026 TEMP211

3027 TEMP212

3028 TEMP213

3029 TEMP214

3030 TEMP215

3031 TEMP216

3032 TEMP217

3033 TEMP218

3034 TEMP219

3035 TEMP220

3036 TEMP221

3037 TEMP222

3038 TEMP223

3039 TEMP224

3040 TEMP225

3041 TEMP226

3042 TEMP227

3043 TEMP228

3044 TEMP229

3045 TEMP230

3046 TEMP231

3047 TEMP232

3048 TEMP233

3049 TEMP234

3050 TEMP235

3051 TEMP236

3052 TEMP237

3053 TEMP238

3054 TEMP239

3055 TEMP240

3056 TEMP241

3057 TEMP242

3058 TEMP243

3059 TEMP244

3060 TEMP245

3061 TEMP246

3062 TEMP247

3063 TEMP248

3064 TEMP249

3065 TEMP250

3066 TEMP251

3067 TEMP252

3068 TEMP253

3069 TEMP254

3070 TEMP255

3071 TEMP256

⎯ 240 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix I

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)

1. Relay identification

2. Preliminary check

3. Hardware test

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Percentage current differential element DIF test

4.2 2F-lock element check

4.3 5F-lock element check

4.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC test

4.5 Restricted earth fault element REF test

4.6 Overcurrent element test

4.7 Thermal overload element THR test

4.8 Frequency element FRQ test

4.9 Overexcitation element V/F test

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

7. Conjunctive test

⎯ 241 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

1. Relay identification

Type

Serial number

System frequency

Date

Model

Station

Circuit

Engineer

Protection scheme

Active settings group number

Witness

2. Preliminary check

Ratings

CT shorting contacts

DC power supply

Power up

Wiring

Relay inoperative

alarm contact

Calendar and clock

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check

Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

⎯ 242 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4. Function test

4.1 Percentage current differential element DIF test

(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting

Measured current

(2) Percentage restraining characteristic test

Measured current (I )

Tap setting

× I

(3) Operating time test

Tap setting

Test current

Measured time

4.2 2F-lock element check

4.3 5F-lock element check

4.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC test

(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting

Measured current

(2) Operating time test

Tap setting

Test current

Measured time

4.5 Restricted earth fault element REF test

Measured current (I )

Tap setting

× I

⎯ 243 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

4.6 Overcurrent element test

(1) OC element

Element

Tap setting

Test current

Measured current

(2) EF element

Element

(3) OCI element

Element

Measured operating time

OCI

2 × I

20 × I

I : Setting value

(4) EFI element

Element

Test current

2 × I

Measured operating time

EFI

20 × I

4.7 Thermal overload element THR test

Element

Test current

Measured operating time

THR

4.8 Frequency element FRQ test

(1) Frequency

Element

FRQ-L1

FRQ-L2

FRQ-H1

FRQ-H2

Setting

Measured frequency

⎯ 244 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

(2) Undervoltage block

Setting

Measured voltage

4.9 Overexcitation element V/F test

(1) Operating value test

Element

Setting

Measured voltage

V/F

(2) Operating time test

Test voltage

Measured operating time

5. Protection scheme test

Scheme

Results

6. Metering and recording check

7. Conjunctive test

Scheme

On load

Results

Tripping circuit

⎯ 245 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 246 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix J

Return Repair Form

⎯ 247 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRT100 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan

For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department

Quality Assurance Section

Type: GRT100

Model:

GRT100

(Example: Type:

Model: 101D- 10-A0 )

Product No.:

Serial No. :

Date:

1. Why the relay is being returned ?

† mal-operation

† does not operate

† increased error

† investigation

† others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are

very helpful information to investigate the incident.

So please inform us the information concerned in the incident with Floppy Disk, or filling up

the Fault Record sheet and Relay Setting sheet attached.

⎯ 248 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Fault Record

Date/Month/Year Time

(Example: 04/ Nov./ 1997

15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:

Prefault values (CT ratio:

I :

kA/:

A, VT ratio:

I :

kV/:

kA or A∠

kV or V∠

kA or A

kA or A∠

I :

11:

12:

21:

22:

I :

kA or A

d01

d02

d03

kA or A

I :

Fault values

(CT ratio:

kA or A∠

kV or V∠

kA or A

kA/:

A, VT ratio:

I :

kV/:

I :

kA or A∠

I :

11:

12:

21:

22:

I :

kA or A

d01

d02

d03

kA or A

I :

⎯ 249 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident.

4. Please write the detail of the incident.

5. Date of the incident occurred.

Day/ Month/ Year:

(Example: 10/ July/ 1998)

6. Please write any comments on the GRT100, including the document.

⎯ 250 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Customer

Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Telephone No.:

Facsimile No.:

Signature:

⎯ 251 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 252 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix K

Technical Data

⎯ 253 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

TECHNICAL DATA

Ratings

AC current

AC voltage

Frequency

DC power supply

1A or 5A

100V, 110V, 115V, 120V

50Hz or 60Hz

110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 to 150Vdc)

220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 to 300Vdc)

48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 to 72Vdc)

24Vdc/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 to 36Vdc)

maximum 12%

AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11

DC supply interruption IEC 60255-11

Permissive duration of DC supply voltage

interruption to maintain normal operation

maximum 50ms at 110Vdc

less than 10s

Restart time

Binary input circuit DC voltage

110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 to 150Vdc)

220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 to 300Vdc)

48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 to 72Vdc)

24Vdc/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 to 36Vdc)

Overload rating

AC current input

4 times rated continuous

100 times rated for 1s

2 times rated continuous

2.5 times rated for 1s

AC voltage input

Burden

AC current circuit

0.3VA per phase (at rated 5A)

0.4VA at zero sequence circuit (at rated 5A)

0.1VA per phase (at rated 1A)

0.3VA at zero sequence circuit (at rated 1A)

AC voltage circuit

DC power supply

0.1VA (at rated voltage)

less than 15W (quiescent)

less than 25W(operation)

0.5W/input at 110Vdc

Binary input circuit

Current differential protection

Minimum operate current (ik)

Slope 1 (p1)

0.10 to 1.00pu in 0.01pu steps

10 to 100% in 1% steps

10 to 200% in 1% steps

1.00 to 10.00pu in 0.01pu steps

0 to 330° in 30° steps

Slope 2 (p2)

Vector group compensation

CT ratio correction (Winding 1 to 3) (kct1 – kct3)

Inrush setting (2nd harmonic ratio) (k2f)

Overexcitation setting (5th harmonic ratio) (k5f)

Operating time

0.05 to 50.00 in 0.01 steps

10 to 50% in 1% steps

10 to 100% in 1% steps

typical 35ms

High-set differential overcurrent protection

Overcurrent (kh)

2.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps

typical 20ms

Operating time

⎯ 254 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Restricted earth fault element

Minimum operating current

Slope 1 (p1)

0.05 to 0.50pu in 0.01pu steps

10 %

Slope 2 (p2)

50 to 100% in 1% steps

0.50 to 2.00pu in 0.01pu steps

1.00 to 50.00 in 0.01 steps

typical 35ms

CT ratio correction (kct)

Operating time

Time-overcurrent protection

High-set overcurrent element

Pick up level (OC, EF)

Delay time (TOC, TEF)

Operating time

0.10 to 20.00pu in 0.10pu steps

0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps

typical 30ms (without delay time)

Inverse time overcurrent element

Pick up level (OCI, EFI)

Time multiplier (TOCI, TEFI)

Characteristic

0.10 to 5.00pu in 0.01pu steps

0.05 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps

Three IEC standard 60255-3 (Standard inverse, Very inverse,

Extremely inverse), or Long-time inverse

*Refer to Appendix P.

Thermal overload protection

Thermal time constant (τ)

Constant (k)

0.5 to 500.0min in 0.1min steps

0.10 to 4.00 in 0.01 steps

Basic current (IB)

0.50 t0 2.50pu in 0.01pu steps

0.00 to 1.00pu in 0.01 steps

0 to 10min in 1min steps

Special load current before overload (Ip)

Time for alarming (TA)

Frequency protection

Overfrequency

50.00 to 55.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (50Hz relay)

60.00 to 66.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (60Hz relay)

45.00 to 50.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (50Hz relay)

54.00 to 60.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (60Hz relay)

0.00 to 60.00s in 0.01s steps

Underfrequency

Delay time

Start time

less than 100ms

Undervoltage blocking

Overexitation protection

Pickup voltage

40 to 100V in 1V steps

100.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps

1.03 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps

Alarm level (A)

High level (H)

1.10 to 1.40pu in 0.01pu steps

1.05 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps

1 to 600s in 1s steps

Low level (L)

LT (Definite time)

HT (Definite time)

TVFH (Definite time)

TVFA (Definite time)

Start time

1 to 600s in 1s steps

less than 130ms

RT (Definite time)

60 to 3600s in 1s steps

⎯ 255 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Accuracy

Current differential element: pick-up

reset

±5%

Time-overcurrent protection: pick-up

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics:

Standard inverse, Very and long-time inverse

Extremely inverse

IEC60255-3 class 5

IEC60255-3 class 7.5

Thermal overload protection: pick-up

Frequency protection: pick-up

Overexitation protection

Disturbance record initiation

Overcurrent element

±10%

±0.03Hz

±2% of pick-up voltage (frequency range ±2%)

0.10 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps

0.05 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps

0.3s (fixed)

Earth fault

Pre-fault time

Post-fault time

0.1 to 3.0s in 0.1s steps

Communication port

Front communication port (local PC)

Connection

Point to point

Cable type

Multi-core (straight)

15m (max.)

Cable length

Connector

RS232C 9-pin D-subminiature connector female

Rear communication port (remote PC)

RS485 I/F:

Transmission data rate for RSM system

Connection

64kbps

Multidrop mode (max. 32 relays)

Screw terminals

Connector

Cable and length

Twisted pair cable, max. 1200m

2kVac for 1min.

Isolation

Fibre optic I/F:

ST connector, graded-index multi-mode 50/125μm or

62.5/125μm type optical fibres

Ethernet LAN I/F:

100BASE-TX: RJ-45 connector

100BASE-FX: SC connector

IRIG-B port

Connection

BNC connector

Cable type

50 ohm coaxial cable

Binary inputs

Operating voltage

Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating

Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating

Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating

Typical 16Vdc(min.15Vdc) for 24V/30Vdc rating

⎯ 256 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Contact ratings

Trip contacts

Make and carry

5A continuously,

30A, 290Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=10ms)

0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Break

Auxiliary contacts

Make and carry

4A continuously,

10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≧5ms)

0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Break

Durability

Make and carry

Break

10,000 operations minimum

100,000 operations minimum

Mechanical design

Weight

12kg

Case color

Installation

2.5Y7.5/1(approximation to Munsell value)

Flush mounting or rack mounting

⎯ 257 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

CT requirement

The GRT100 does not require the use of dedicated CTs nor the use of CTs with an identical ratio.

The GRT100 can share the CTs with other protections and the different ratios are adjusted by

setting.

The general CT requirements are set for the through-fault stability which comes up when any CTs

saturate under very large through-fault currents. To ensure correct operation of the GRT100 for

such through-fault currents, the factor Ks of each CT is required to satisfy the following

conditions:

Ks ≧1 when Tc ≦150ms

Ks ≧5 when Tc ≦200ms

where,

Ks = ratio of CT knee point voltage to CT secondary probable voltage under the maximum

through-fault current

= Vk / {(R_CT+ R_L+ R_B+ R_O)(I_Fmax / CT ratio)}

Tc = d.c. time constant of primary circuit

Vk = knee point voltage of CT

R_CT= resistance of CT secondary winding

R_L= loop resistance of cable between CT and relay

R_B= ohmic load of GRT100 (i.e. 0.1 ohm for 1A rating and 0.012 ohm for 5A rating)

R_O= ohmic load of other series-connected relays (if any)

I_Fmax = maximum through-fault current

For example, if the following parameters are given:

Vk = 800 V, CT ratio = 1,200/1, R_CT= 5.0 ohm, R_L= 3.0 ohm, R_B= 0.1 ohm,

R_O= 0 ohm (i.e. no series-connected relays) and I_Fmax = 40kA

then the factor Ks is calculated as:

Ks = 800/{(5.0 + 3.0 + 0.1)×(40,000/1,200) }

= 800/270

= 3.0

This shows that the GRT100 operates correctly for all the faults under the condition that the d.c.

time constant of the primary circuit is less than 200ms.

⎯ 258 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE CLAIMS

Test

Standards

Details

Atmospheric Environment

Temperature

IEC60068-2-1/2

Operating range: -10°C to +55°C.

Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.

56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.

IP51 (Rear: IP20)

Humidity

IEC60068-2-78

IEC60529

Enclosure Protection

Mechanical Environment

Vibration

IEC60255-21-1

Response - Class 1

Endurance - Class 1

Shock and Bump

IEC60255-21-2

Shock Response Class 1

Shock Withstand Class 1

Bump Class 1

Seismic

IEC60255-21-3

IEC60255-5

Class 1

Electrical Environment

Dielectric Withstand

2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.

2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.

1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse

IEC60255-5

Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),

1.2/50μs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals

and earth.

Electromagnetic Environment

High Frequency

Disturbance / Damped IEC61000-4-12 /

IEC60255-22-1 Class 3,

1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.

1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.

Oscillatory Wave

EN61000-4-12

Electrostatic

Discharge

IEC60255-22-2 Class 3,

IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2

6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.

Radiated RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC60255-22-3 Class 3,

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz and

IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450, 900 and

1890MHz.

Fast Transient

Disturbance

IEC60255-22-4,

IEC61000-4-4 / EN61000-4-4

4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.

Surge Immunity

IEC60255-22-5,

IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5

1.2/50μs surge in common/differential modes:

HV ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)

PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)

RS485 port: 1kV (peak)

Conducted RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC60255-22-6 Class 3,

IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.

Power Frequency

Disturbance

IEC60255-22-7,

IEC61000-4-16 /

EN61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.

150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.

Not applicable to AC inputs.

Conducted and

IEC60255-25,

Conducted emissions:

Radiated Emissions

EN55022 Class A,

0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)

IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)

Radiated emissions (at 30m):

30 to 230MHz: <30dB

230 to 1000MHz: <37dB

⎯ 259 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Test

Standards

Details

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC

Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic

Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN

61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EEC

Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive

is demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.

⎯ 260 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix L

Setting of REF Element

⎯ 261 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Type of transformer

Scheme switch setting

[1REF] = 1I0

[2REF] = 1I0

2ct-1

1ct-1

1nCT

2nCT

1REF

I_n1

2REF

I_n2

[1REF] = 2I0

1ct-1

2REF1 = OFF

2REF2 = OFF

2REF3 = OFF

2REF4 = OFF

2REF5 = OFF

1REF

1nCT

I_n1

3REF1 = OFF

3REF2 = OFF

3REF3 = OFF

3REF4 = OFF

3REF5 = OFF

1ct-2

1ct-1

1REF = 1I0

1nCT

I_n1

1REF

⎯ 262 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Type of transformer

Scheme switch setting

2REF = 1I0

I₀₂

2ct-1

1REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

2nCT

I_2N

2REF

1REF = 1I0

2REF = 1I0

3REF = 1I0

1ct-1

2ct-1

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

1nCT

2nCT

1REF

2REF

I_2N

I_1N

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

3REF

3nCT

3ct-1

I_3N

1REF = 1I0

2REF = 1I0

1ct-1

2ct-1

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

1nCT

2nCT

1REF

2REF

I_2N

I_1N

⎯ 263 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Type of transformer

Scheme switch setting

1ct-1

1REF = 1I0

3REF = 1I0

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

1nCT

2REF1 to 5 = OFF

1REF

I_1N

3nCT

I_3N

3REF

3ct-1

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

2ct-1

2REF = 1I0

3REF = 1I0

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

2nCT

1REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_2N

3nCT

2REF

I_3N

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

3REF

3ct-1

1REF = 1I0

1ct-1

2REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

1nCT

1REF

I_1N

2REF = 1I0

2ct-1

1REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

2nCT

2REF

I_2N

⎯ 264 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Type of transformer

Scheme switch setting

3REF = 1I0

1REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

3ct-1

3nCT

I_3N

3REF

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

1REF = 2I0

3REF = 1I0

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

2REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

I_3N

I_1N

3REF

1REF

I_2a,I_2b,I_2c

1REF = 2I0

1ct-1

2REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

1nCT

I_1N

1REF

1ct-2

I_2a,I_2b,I_2c

1REF = 1I0

2REF = 2I0

2ct-1

I_1a,I_1b,I_1c

1ct-1

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

1nCT

I_1N

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

1REF

2nCT

I_2N

2REF

2ct-2

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

⎯ 265 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Type of transformer

Scheme switch setting

2REF = 2I0

2ct-1

1REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

2nCT

I_2N

2REF

2ct-2

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

1REF = 3I0

I_1a,I_1b,I_1c

1ct-1

I_2a,I_2b,I_2c

1ct-2

2REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

1nCT

I_1N

1REF

1ct-3

I_3a,I_3b,I_3c

1REF = 3I0

1ct-1

2REF1 to 5 = OFF

3REF1 to 5 = OFF

I_1a

I_1b

I_1c

1nCT

I_1N

1REF

I_3a

I_3b

I_3c

I_2a

I_2b

I_2c

1ct-2

1ct-3

⎯ 266 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix M

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

⎯ 267 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:

Signal names

Marked with

Marked with [

Marked with "

Unmarked

: Measuring element output signal

: Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment

] : Scheme switch

" : Scheme switch position

: Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates

Output

Other cases

Output

Other cases

Output

Other cases

OR gates

Output

≥1

Output

Other cases

Output

Other cases

Output

Other cases

⎯ 268 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Signal inversion

Output

Timer

Delaye pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

XXX

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delaye pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

XXX - YYY

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

XXX - YYY

One-shot timer

Output

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Flip-flop

Output

No change

Output

F/F

Scheme switch

Switch

Output

Other cases

Switch

Output

OFF

⎯ 269 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 270 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix N

Implementation of Thermal Model to

IEC60255-8

⎯ 271 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8

Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time

constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).

I²

−t

⎛

⎜

⎝

⎞

⎟

⎠

θ =

1− e

×100%

(1)

I_AOL

where:

θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,

I = applied load current,

_AOL= kI = allowable overload current of the system,

τ = thermal time constant of the system.

The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where 0%

represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further

temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for any

given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting I_AOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ = 100%.

If current I is applied to a cold system, then θ will rise exponentially from 0% to (I²/I_AOL× 100%), with time

constant τ, as in Figure N-1. If θ = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.

θ (%)

100%

I ²

I _A²_OL

×100%

I ²

−

⎛

⎞

⎜

⎟

_⎝1− e

_⎠×100%

I ²_AOL

t (s)

Figure N-1

A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times

according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.

I²

⎡

⎢

⎣

⎤

⎥

⎦

t =τ·Ln

(1) ····· Cold curve

(2) ····· Hot curve

I²− I²_AOL

I²− I_P

I²− I²

⎡

⎢

⎤

⎥

t =τ·Ln

⎢

⎣

⎥

⎦

AOL

⎯ 272 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

where:

I_P= prior load current.

In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current I_P= 0, catering for

the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.

Figure N-2 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and is

then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient temperature.

θ (%)

Overload Current

Condition

Trip at 100%

100%

Normal Load

Current Condition

Cooling Curve

t (s)

Figure N-2 (1) Thermal Curve without Prior Load Current

θ (%)

Overload Current

Condition

Trip at 100%

100%

Cooling Curve

80%

Normal Load

Current Condition

t (s)

Figure N-2 (2) Thermal curve with Prior Load Current (θ=80%)

⎯ 273 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 274 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix O

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and

Troubleshooting

⎯ 275 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC60870-5-103 Configurator

IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily as

follows:

Installation of IEC103 Configurator

Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.

Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “\IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and operate it

according to the message.

When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start

menu.

Starting IEC103 Configurator

Click [Start]→[Programs]→[IEC103 Configurator]→[IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator

software.

Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking

[Help]→[Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

1. Physical Layer

1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485

Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment

1.2 Optical interface

Glass fibre (option)

ST type connector (option)

1.3 Transmission speed

User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s

2. Application Layer

COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU

One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

3. List of Information

The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.

(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0812.)

Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal

number), COT

Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),

COT, Type of measurand quantities

Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)

Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of

measurand quantities

Common setting

• Transmission cycle of Measurand frame

⎯ 276 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

• FUN of System function

• Test mode, etc.

CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC supply of

the relay and turn on again.

3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface

3.1.1 Spontaneous events

The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers

(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.

3.1.2 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information

numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.

3.1.3 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read

from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can

be customized.

3.1.4 Commands

The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported commands

with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.4.

3.1.5 Test mode

In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in

the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.

This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally

transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.5.

3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction

If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and

measurands are no longer transmitted.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.6.

3.2 List of Information

The followings are the default settings.

⎯ 277 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

List of Information

IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF

Description

Contents

GI Type

COT

FUN

DPI

Signal No.

OFF ON

Standard Information numbers in monitor direction

System Function

End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items.

255

176

Time Synchronization

Reset FCB

Time Synchronization ACK.

Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK

Reset CU ACK

Reset CU

Start/Restart

Power On

Relay start/restart

Relay power on.

Not supported

Status Indications

If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set

active, if impossible, inactive.

16 Auto-recloser active

Not supported

If protection using telecommunication is available,

this item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.

17 Teleprotection active

18 Protection active

19 LED reset

Not supported

If the protection is available, this item is set to

active. If not, set to inactive.

1, 7, 9, 12,

20, 21

176

1413

1409

1241

1242

1, 7, 11, 12,

20, 21

Reset of latched LEDs

Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control

system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.

20 Monitor direction blocked

21 Test mode

9, 11

176

Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to

control system. IECTST "ON" setting.

176

When a setting change has done at the local, the

event is sent to control system.

22 Local parameter Setting

23 Characteristic1

24 Characteristic2

25 Characteristic3

26 Characteristic4

Not supported

176

1, 7, 9, 11,

12, 20, 21

Setting group 1 active

Setting group 2 active

Setting group 3 active

Setting group 4 active

1243

1244

1245

1246

1, 7, 9, 11,

12, 20, 21

176

1, 7, 9, 11,

12, 20, 21

176

1, 7, 9, 11,

12, 20, 21

176

27 Auxiliary input1

28 Auxiliary input2

29 Auxiliary input3

30 Auxiliary input4

Supervision Indications

32 Measurand supervision I

Zero sequence current supervision

Zero sequence voltage supervision

1, 7, 9

176

1271

33 Measurand supervision V

Not supported

176

35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision

36 Trip circuit supervision

37 I>>backup operation

38 VT fuse failure

Output circuit supervision

VT failure

39 Teleprotection disturbed

46 Group warning

CF(Communication system Fail) supervision

Only alarming

1, 7, 9

1258

1252

47 Group alarm

Trip blocking and alarming

176

Earth Fault Indications

48 Earth Fault L1

A phase earth fault

B phase earth fault

C phase earth fault

Earth fault forward

Earth fault reverse

49 Earth Fault L2

50 Earth Fault L3

51 Earth Fault Fwd

52 Earth Fault Rev

Not supported

⎯ 278 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF

Description

Contents

GI Type

COT

FUN

DPI

Signal NO.

OFF ON

Fault Indications

64 Start/pick-up L1

65 Start/pick-up L2

66 Start/pick-up L3

67 Start/pick-up N

68 General trip

69 Trip L1

A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up

B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up

C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up

Earth fault element pick-up

Any trip

1, 7

176

1280

A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip

B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip

C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip

Back up trip

70 Trip L2

71 Trip L3

72 Trip I>>(back-up)

Not supported

Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km

selectable by IECFL)

73 Fault location X In ohms

Not supported

74 Fault forward/line

Forward fault

Reverse fault

Not supported

75 Fault reverse/Busbar

Teleprotection Signal

transmitted

Carrier signal sending

Not supported

77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving

78 Zone1

Zone 1 trip

Not supported

79 Zone2

Zone 2 trip

Not supported

80 Zone3

Zone 3 trip

Not supported

81 Zone4

Zone 4 trip

Not supported

82 Zone5

Zone 5 trip

Not supported

83 Zone6

Zone 6 trip

Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up

85 Breaker Failure

86 Trip measuring system L1

87 Trip measuring system L2

88 Trip measuring system L3

89 Trip measuring system E

90 Trip I>

Any elements pick-up

CBF trip or CBF retrip

Not supported

Inverse time OC trip

91 Trip I>>

Definite time OC trip

92 Trip IN>

Inverse time earth fault OC trip

Definite time earth fault OC trip

93 Trip IN>>

Autoreclose indications

128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose

CB close command output

Autoreclose block

Not supported

CB 'ON' by long-time

Autoreclose

129

130 Autoreclose Blocked

⎯ 279 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC103 configurator Default setting

INF

Description

Contents

Type

COT

FUN Max. No.

Measurands

144 Measurand I

145 Measurand I,V

146 Measurand I,V,P,Q

147 Measurand IN,VEN

Ib1, Vab measurand <meaurand I>

3.2

2, 7

176

Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,

148

Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, f measurand <meaurand II>

P,Q,f

Generic Function

240 Read Headings

Not supported

Read attributes of all entries

241

of a group

243 Read directory of entry

244 Real attribute of entry

245 End of GGI

Not supported

249 Write entry with confirm

250 Write entry with execute

251 Write entry aborted

Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator

Offset Data type

Limit

Lower

Co eff

INF MEA Tb1

Upper

4096

145

148

Ib1

Vab

Ia1

Ia2

Ia3

short

1.706666

3.413333

1.706666

short

4096

0.0000833

⎯ 280 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF

Description

Contents

Type

COM

COT

FUN

Selection of standard information numbers in control direction

System functions

Initiation of general

interrogation

255

Time synchronization

General commands

16 Auto-recloser on/off

Not supported

17 Teleprotection on/off

18 Protection on/off

(*1)

ON/OFF

176

19 LED reset

Reset indication of latched LEDs.

Setting Group 1

Setting Group 2

Setting Group 3

Setting Group 4

23 Activate characteristic 1

24 Activate characteristic 2

25 Activate characteristic 3

26 Activate characteristic 4

Generic functions

Read headings of all defined

groups

240

Not supported

Read values or attributes of all

entries of one group

241

Read directory of a single

entry

243

Read values or attributes of a

single entry

244

General Interrogation of

generic data

245

248 Write entry

249 Write entry with confirmation

250 Write entry with execution

(∗1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, " IN SERVICE LED" is off.

Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator

DCO

Sig off Sig on

INF

Rev

Valid time

2686

2688

2640

2641

2642

2643

✓

200

1000

✓: signal reverse

⎯ 281 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GRT100

supported

Description

Contents

Comment

Basic application functions

Test mode

Yes

Blocking of monitor direction

Disturbance data

Generic services

Private data

Yes

Miscellaneous

Measurand

Max. MVAL = rated

value times

Current L1

Configurable

Current L2

Current L3

Voltage L1-E

Voltage L2-E

Voltage L3-E

Active power P

Reactive power Q

Frequency f

Configurable

Voltage L1 - L2

Vab

Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator

- Setting file’s remark:

GRT100_1.00

- Remote operation valid time [ms]:

- Local operation valid time [ms]:

- Measurand period [s]:

4000

- Function type of System functions: 176

- Signal No. of Test mode:

1242

- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279

⎯ 282 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

[Legend]

GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)

Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)

1 : time-tagged message

2 : time-tagged message with relative time

3 : measurands I

4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time

5 : identification

6 : time synchronization

8 : general interrogation termination

9 : measurands II

10: generic data

11: generic identification

20: general command

23: list of recorded disturbances

26: ready for transmission for disturbance data

27: ready for transmission of a channel

28: ready for transmission of tags

29: transmission of tags

30: transmission of disturbance values

31: end of transmission

COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)

1: spontaneous

2: cyclic

3: reset frame count bit (FCB)

4: reset communication unit (CU)

5: start / restart

6: power on

7: test mode

8: time synchronization

9: general interrogation

10: termination of general interrogation

11: local operation

12: remote operation

20: positive acknowledgement of command

21: negative acknowledgement of command

31: transmission of disturbance data

40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command

41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command

42: valid data response to generic read command

43: invalid data response to generic read command

44: generic write confirmation

FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)

DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)

DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)

⎯ 283 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:

(1) Naming for IEC103setting data

The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be

provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:

First draft:

Second draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_02.csv

Third draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_03.csv

∗∗∗∗∗∗_01.csv

Revision number

The name “∗∗∗∗∗∗” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100 or

GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte characters.

It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.

(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data

The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy disk) or

CD-R, not to remain in the folder.

⎯ 284 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Troubleshooting

No.

Phenomena

Supposed causes

Check / Confirmation

Procedure

Object

BCU

Communication

trouble (IEC103

communication is

not available.)

Address setting is incorrect.

Match address setting between BCU and relay.

Avoid duplication of address with other relay.

Transmission baud rate setting is

incorrect.

BCU

Match transmission baud rate setting between

BCU and relay.

Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of

data that BCU transmits to relay is

incorrect.

BCU

Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay

setting is fixed as following settings.

- Start bit: 1bit

- Stop bit: 1bit

- Parity setting: even

RS485 or optical cable interconnection

is incorrect.

Cable

- Check the connection port.

- Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM

- Check the send and received interconnection of

optical cable.

The setting of converter is incorrect.

(RS485/optic conversion is executed

with the transmission channel, etc.)

Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW

setting in reference to INSTRUCTION MANUAL

(6F2S0794).

The relationship between logical “0/1” of BCU

the signal and Sig.on/off is incorrect. (In

the event of using optical cable)

Check the following;

Logical0 : Sig.on

Logical1:Sig.off

Terminal resistor is not offered.

(Especially when RS485 cable is long.)

cable

BCU

Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends

of RS 485 cable.

Relay cannot receive the requirement

frame from BCU.

Check to secure the margin more than 15ms

between receiving the reply frame from the relay

and transmitting the next requirement frame on

BCU.

(The timing coordination of sending and

receiving switch control is irregular in

half-duplex communication.)

The requirement frame from BCU and

the reply frame from relay contend.

BCU

Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the

relay.

(The sending and receiving timing

coordination is irregular in half-duplex

communication.)

Time-out setting: more than 100ms (acceptable

value of response time 50ms plus

margin)

⎯ 285 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

HMI does not

display IEC103

event on the SAS

side.

The relevant event sending condition is RY

not valid.

Change the event sending condition (signal

number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a setting

error. When the setting is correct, check the signal

condition by programmable LED, etc.

The relevant event Information Number RY

(INF) and/or Function Type (FUN) may

be different between the relay and SAS.

Match the relevant event Information Number

(INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the relay

and SAS.

SAS

The relay is not initialised after writing

IEC103 configurator setting.

Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from

the LCD screen. When differing from the sum

value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the relay.

It changes to the block mode.

Change the IECBR settling to Normal.

Time can be

BCU does not transmit the frame of time BCU

Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.

synchronised with synchronisation.

IEC103

The settling of time synchronisation

Change the settling of time synchronisation

source to IEC.

communication.

source is set to other than IEC.

(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay

⎯ 286 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix P

IEC61850: MICS & PICS

⎯ 287 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

MICS: IEC61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement

The GRT100 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the

following tables.

Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4

Logical Nodes

GRT100

GGIO

Nodes

GSAL

Yes

GRT100

---

L: System Logical Nodes

LPHD

Common Logical Node

LLN0

P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions

PDIF

PDIR

Yes

I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving

IARC

IHMI

ITCI

---

Yes

---

ITMI

PDIS

---

A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control

PDOP

PDUP

PFRC

PHAR

PHIZ

---

Yes

---

ANCR

ARCO

ATCC

AVCO

---

M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement

PIOC

PMRI

PMSS

POPE

PPAM

PSCH

PSDE

PTEF

PTOC

PTOF

PTOV

PTRC

PTTR

PTUC

PTUV

PUPF

PTUF

PVOC

PVPH

PZSU

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

MDIF

MHAI

MHAN

MMTR

MMXN

MMXU

MSQI

MSTA

---

Yes

---

S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring

SARC

SIMG

SIML

---

SPDC

X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear

XCBR

XSWI

T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers

TCTR

TVTR

---

Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers

R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions

YEFN

YLTC

YPSH

YPTR

---

RDRE

---

RADR

RBDR

RDRS

RBRF

RDIR

RFLO

RPSB

RREC

---

Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment

ZAXN

ZBAT

ZCAB

ZCAP

ZCON

ZGEN

ZGIL

---

RSYN

C: Logical Nodes for Control

CALH

CCGR

CILO

CPOW

---

ZLIN

ZMOT

ZREA

ZRRC

ZSAR

ZTCF

ZTCR

CSWI

G: Logical Nodes for Generic references

GAPC

Yes

⎯ 288 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes

GRT100

Status information

SPS

DPS

Yes

---

INS

ACT

ACD

SEC

Yes

---

BCR

---

Measured information

CMV

SAV

Yes

---

WYE

DEL

Yes

---

SEQ

HMV

Yes

---

HWYE

---

HDEL

---

Controllable status information

SPC

DPC

Yes

---

INC

BSC

Yes

---

ISC

---

Controllable analogue information

APC

---

Status settings

SPG

---

ING

Yes

Analogue settings

ASG

CURVE

Yes

---

Description information

DPL

LPL

CSD

Yes

---

⎯ 289 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

LPHD class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

PhyName

PhyHealth

OutOv

Proxy

InOv

NumPwrUp

WrmStr

WacTrg

PwrUp

PwrDn

PwrSupAlm

RsStat

DPL

INS

SPS

INS

SPS

SPC

Physical device name plate

Physical device health

Output communications buffer overflow

Indicates if this LN is a proxy

Input communications buffer overflow

Number of Power ups

Number of Warm Starts

Number of watchdog device resets detected

Power Up detected

Power Down detected

External power supply alarm

Reset device statistics

Common Logical Node class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)

Mod

Beh

Health

NamPlt

INC

INS

LPL

Mode

Behaviour

Health

Name plate

Optional Logical Node Information

Loc

SPS

INS

DPL

INC

INS

Local operation

EEHealth

EEName

OpCntRs

OpCnt

External equipment health

External equipment name plate

Operation counter resetable

Operation counter

OpTmh

Operation time

Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

⎯ 290 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

LLNO class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

Loc

SPS

INS

Local operation for complete logical device

Operation time

OpTmh

Controls

Diag

SPC

Run Diagnostics

LED reset

LEDRs

PDIF class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

INC

Resetable operation counter

Status Information

Str

TmAst

ACD

ACT

CSD

Start

Operate

Active curve charactristic

Measured Values

DifAClc

RstA

WYE

Differential Current

Restraint Current

Settings

LinCapac

LoSet

ASG

ING

CURVE

Line capacitance (for load currents)

Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current

High operate value, percentage of the nominal current

Minimum Operate Time

Maximum Operate Time

Restraint Mode

HiSet

MinOpTmms

MaxOpTmms

RstMod

RsDlTmms

TmACrv

Reset Delay Time

Operating Curve Type

⎯ 291 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PHAR class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

Status Information

Str

INC

ACD

Resetable operation counter

Start

Settings

HarRst

PhStr

PhStop

OpDlTmms

RsDlTmms

ING

ASG

ING

Number of harmonic restrained

Start Value

Stop Value

Operate Delay Time

Reset Delay Time

PTOC class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

INC

Resetable operation counter

Status Information

Str

TmASt

ACD

ACT

CSD

Start

Operate

Active curve characteristic

Settings

TmACrv

StrVal

CURVE

ASG

ING

Operating Curve Type

Start Value

TmMult

Time Dial Multiplier

Minimum Operate Time

Maximum Operate Time

Operate Delay Time

Type of Reset Curve

Reset Delay Time

Directional Mode

MinOpTmms

MaxOpTmms

OpDlTmms

TypRsCrv

RsDlTmms

DirMod

⎯ 292 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PTOF class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

INC

Resetable operation counter

Status Information

Str

BlkV

ACD

ACT

SPS

Start

Operate

Blocked because of voltage

Settings

StrVal

BlkVal

OpDITmms

RsDITmms

ASG

ING

Start Value (frequency)

Voltage Block Value

Operate Delay Time

Reset Delay Time

PTRC class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

INC

Resetable operation counter

Status Information

Str

ACT

ACD

Trip

Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions)

Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes

Settings

TrMod

TrPlsTmms

ING

Trip Mode

Trip Pulse Time

Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.

⎯ 293 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PTTR class

Attribute Name

LNName

Attr. Type Explanation

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O GRT100

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

Measured Values

Amp

Tmp

TmpRl

LodRsvAlm

LodRsvTr

AgeRat

INC

Resetable operation counter

Current for thermal load model

Temperature for thermal load

Relation between temperature and max. temperature

Load reserve to alarm

Load reserve to trip

Ageing rate

Status Information

Str

AlmThm

TmTmpSt

TmASt

ACD

ACT

CSD

Start

Operate

Thermal Alarm

Active curve characteristic

Settings

TmTmpCrv

TmACrv

TmpMax

StrVal

OpDlTmms

MinOpTmms

MaxOpTmms

RsDlTmms

ConsTms

AlmVal

CURVE

ASG

ING

Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement

Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model

Maximum allowed temperature

Start Value

Operate Delay Time

Minimum Operate Time

Maximum Operate Time

Reset Delay Time

Time constant of the thermal model

Alarm Value

ASG

PTUF class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

INC

Resetable operation counter

Status Information

Str

BlkV

ACD

ACT

SPS

Start

Operate

Blocked because of voltage

Settings

StrVal

BlkVal

OpDlTmms

RsDlTmms

ASG

ING

Start Value (frequency)

Voltage Block Value

Operate Delay Time

Reset Delay Time

⎯ 294 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PVPH class

Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation

M/O GRT100

LNName

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

OpCntRs

INC

Resetable operation counter

Status Information

Str

VHzSt

ACD

ACT

CSD

Start

Operate

Active curve characteristic

Settings

VHzCrv

StrVal

OpDlTmms

TypRsCrv

RsDlTmms

TmMult

CURVE

ASG

ING

ASG

ING

Operating Curve Type

Volts per hertz Start Value

Operate Delay Time

Type of Reset Curve

Reset Delay Time

Time Dial Multiplier

Minimum Operate Time

Maximum Operate Time

MinOpTmms

MaxOpTmms

GAPC class

Attribute Name

LNName

Attr. Type Explanation

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O GRT100

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

Loc

SPS

INC

Local operation

Resetable operation counter

OpCntRs

Controls

SPCSO

DPCSO

ISCSO

SPC

DPC

INC

Single point controllable status output

Double point controllable status output

Integer status controllable status output

Status Information

Auto

Str

SPS

ACD

ACT

Automatic operation

Start

Operate

Setting

StrVal

ASG

Start Value

⎯ 295 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GGIO class

Attribute Name

LNName

Attr. Type Explanation

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O GRT100

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

EEHealth

EEName

Loc

OpCntRs

Measured values

AnIn

INS

DPL

SPS

INC

External equipment health (external sensor)

External equipment name plate

Local operation

Resetable operation counter

Analogue input

Controls

SPCSO

DPCSO

ISCSO

SPC

DPC

INC

Single point controllable status output

Double point controllable status output

Integer status controllable status output

Status Information

IntIn

Alm

INS

Integer status input

General single alarm

SPS

Ind01

Ind02

Ind03

Ind04

Ind05

Ind06

Ind07

Ind08

Ind09

Ind10

Ind11

Ind12

Ind13

Ind14

Ind15

Ind16

Ind17

Ind18

Ind19

Ind20

Ind21

Ind22

Ind23

Ind24

Ind25

Ind26

General indication (binary input)

⎯ 296 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

MMXN class

Attribute Name

LNName

Attr. Type Explanation

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O GRT100

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

EEHealth

EEName

Measured values

Amp

Vol

Watt

VolAmpr

VolAmp

PwrFact

Imp

INS

DPL

External equipment health (external sensor)

External equipment name plate

CMV

Current I (rms) not allocated to a phase

Voltage V (rms) not allocated to a phase

Power (P) not allocated to a phase

Reactive Power (Q) not allocated to a phase

Apparent Power (S) not allocated to a phase

Power Factor not allocated to a phase

Impedance

Frequency

MMXU class

Attribute Name

LNName

Attr. Type Explanation

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O GRT100

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

EEHealth

INS

External equipment health (external sensor)

Measured values

TotW

TotVAr

TotVA

TotPF

PPV

PhV

VAr

Total Active Power (Total P)

Total Reactive Power (Total Q)

Total Apparent Power (Total S)

Average Power factor (Total PF)

Frequency

Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …)

Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …)

Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)

Phase active power (P)

DEL

WYE

Phase reactive power (Q)

Phase apparent power (S)

Phase power factor

Phase Impedance

⎯ 297 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

MSQI class

Attribute Name

LNName

Attr. Type Explanation

Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

M/O GRT100

Data

Common Logical Node Information

LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class

EEHealth

EEName

Measured values

SeqA

SeqV

DQ0Seq

ImbA

ImbNgA

ImbNgV

ImbPPV

ImbV

ImbZroA

ImbZroV

MaxImbA

MaxImbPPV

MaxImbV

INS

DPL

External equipment health (external sensor)

External equipment name plate

SEQ

WYE

Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current

Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage

DQ0 Sequence

Imbalance current

Imbalance negative sequence current

Imbalance negative sequence voltage

Imbalance phase-phase voltage

Imbalance voltage

Imbalance zero sequence current

Imbalance zero sequence voltage

Maximum imbalance current

DEL

WYE

Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage

Maximum imbalance voltage

Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.

⎯ 298 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

SPS class

Attribute

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

Name

DataName

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

DataAttribute

status

stVal

BOOLEAN

Quality

TimeStamp

ST dchg

ST qchg

TRUE | FALSE

substitution

subEna

subVal

subQ

BOOLEAN

Quality

VISIBLE STRING64

PICS_SUBST

TRUE | FALSE

subID

configuration, description and extension

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 13

INS class

Attribute

Name

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

DataName

DataAttribute

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

status

stVal

INT32

Quality

TimeStamp

ST dchg

ST qchg

Y(*1)

Substitution

subEna

subVal

subQ

BOOLEAN

INT32

Quality

PICS_SUBST

subID

VISIBLE STRING64

configuration, description and extension

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 13

(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.

⎯ 299 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

ACT class

Attribute

Name

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

DataName

DataAttribute

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

status

general

phsA

phsB

phsC

neut

BOOLEAN

Quality

ST dchg

ST qchg

TimeStamp

configuration, description and extension

operTm

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

TimeStamp

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 13

ACD class

Attribute

Name

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

DataName

DataAttribute

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

status

general

dirGeneral

BOOLEAN

ENUMERATED

ST dchg

unknown | forward | backward |

both

phsA

dirPhsA

phsB

dirPhsB

phsC

dirPhsC

neut

dirNeut

BOOLEAN

ENUMERATED

BOOLEAN

ENUMERATED

BOOLEAN

ENUMERATED

BOOLEAN

ENUMERATED

Quality

TimeStamp

ST dchg

ST qchg

GC_2 (1)

GC_2 (2)

GC_2 (3)

GC_2 (4)

unknown | forward | backward

configuration, description and extension

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 13

⎯ 300 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

MV class

Attribute

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

Name

DataName

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

DataAttribute

measured values

instMag

mag

range

AnalogueValue

ENUMERATED

MX dchg

normal | high | low | high-high |

low-low |…

Quality

TimeStamp

MX qchg

substitution

subEna

subVal

subQ

BOOLEAN

AnalogueValue

Quality

PICS_SUBST

subID

VISIBLE STRING64

configuration, description and extension

units

Unit

INT32U

ScaledValueConfig

RangeConfig

see Annex A

0 … 100 000

zeroDb

sVC

rangeC

smpRate

AC_SCAV

GC_CON

INT32U

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

Text

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 21

⎯ 301 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

CMV class

Attribute

Name

DataName

DataAttribute

Attribute Type

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

measured values

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

instCVal

cVal

range

Vector

ENUMERATED

MX dchg

normal | high | low | high-high |

low-low |…

Quality

TimeStamp

MX qchg

substitution

subEna

subVal

subQ

BOOLEAN

Vector

Quality

PICS_SUBST

subID

VISIBLE STRING64

configuration, description and extension

units

Unit

INT32U

RangeConfig

ScaledValueConfig

ENUMERATED

INT32U

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

see Annex A

0 … 100 000

zeroDb

rangeC

magSVC

angSVC

angRef

smpRate

GC_CON

AC_SCAV

V | A | other …

Text

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 21

⎯ 302 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

WYE class

Attribute

Name

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

DataName

Data

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

phsA

phsB

phsC

neut

net

res

CMV

GC_1

DataAttribute

configuration, description and extension

angRef

ENUMERATED

Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc

| Vca | Vother | Aother

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 21

SEQ class

Attribute

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

Name

DataName

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

Data

CMV

DataAttribute

measured attributes

pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero

configuration, description and extension

seqT

ENUMERATED

phsRef

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

ENUMERATED

A | B | C | …

Text

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 21

⎯ 303 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

SPC class

Attribute

Name

DataName

DataAttribute

Attribute Type

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

control and status

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

ctlVal

operTm

origin

ctlNum

SBO

BOOLEAN

TimeStamp

Originator

INT8U_RO

CO, ST

off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)

AC_CO_M

AC_CO_O

0..255

VISIBLE STRING65

AC_CO_SBO_N_

SBOw

SBOW

AC_CO_SBOW_E

Oper

Cancel

Oper

Cancel

AC_CO _M

AC_CO_SBO_N_

M and

AC_CO_SBOW_E

_M and

AC_CO_TA_E_M

stVal

BOOLEAN

Quality

TimeStamp

BOOLEAN

ST dchg

ST qchg

FALSE | TRUE

AC_ST

stSeld

ST dchg

AC_CO_O

substitution

FALSE | TRUE

subEna

subVal

subQ

BOOLEAN

Quality

VISIBLE STRING64

PICS_SUBST

subID

configuration, description and extension

pulseConfig

CtlModel

sboTimeout

sboClass

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

PulseConfig

CtlModels

INT32U

SboClasses

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

AC_CO_O

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 31

⎯ 304 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

INC class

Attribute

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

Name

DataName

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

DataAttribute

control and status

ctlVal

operTm

origin

ctlNum

SBO

SBOw

Oper

INT32

CO, ST

AC_CO_M

AC_CO_O

Y(*2)

TimeStamp

Originator

INT8U

VISIBLE STRING65

SBOW

0..255

AC_CO_O

AC_CO_SBO_N_M

AC_CO_SBOW_E_M

AC_CO _M

Oper

Cancel

AC_CO_SBO_N_M

and

AC_CO_SBOW_E_M

and AC_CO_TA_E_M

stVal

INT32

Quality

TimeStamp

BOOLEAN

ST dchg

ST qchg

stSeld

ST dchg

AC_CO_O

substitution

subEna

subVal

subQ

BOOLEAN

INT32

Quality

PICS_SUBST

FALSE | TRUE

subID

VISIBLE STRING64

configuration, description and extension

CtlModel

sboTimeout

sboClass

minVal

maxVal

stepSize

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

CtlModels

INT32U

SboClasses

INT32

INT32U

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

AC_CO_O

1 … (maxVal – minVal)

Text

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 31

(*2): “ENUM” type is used.

⎯ 305 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

ING class

Attribute

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

Name

DataName

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

DataAttribute

setting

setVal

INT32

SG, SE

AC_NSG_M

AC_SG_M

Y(*3)

configuration, description and extension

minVal

maxVal

stepSize

INT32

INT32U

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

1 … (maxVal – minVal)

Text

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 39

(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.

ASG class

Attribute

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

Name

DataName

DataAttribute

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

setting

setMag

AnalogueValue

SG, SE

AC_NSG_M

AC_SG_M

configuration, description and extension

units

sVC

minVal

maxVal

stepSize

Unit

see Annex A

ScaledValueConfig

AnalogueValue

AC_SCAV

AnalogueValue

1 … (maxVal – minVal)

Text

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 42

⎯ 306 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

DPL class

Attribute

Name

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

DataName

DataAttribute

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

configuration, description and extension

vendor

hwRev

swRev

serNum

model

location

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

VISIBLE STRING255

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 45

LPL class

Attribute

Name

Attribute Type

TrgOp

Value/Value Range

M/O/C

GRT100

DataName

DataAttribute

Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)

configuration, description and extension

vendor

swRev

configRev

ldNs

VISIBLE STRING255

UNICODE STRING255

VISIBLE STRING255

AC_LN0_M

AC_LN0_EX

shall be included in LLN0 only;

for example "IEC

61850-7-4:2003"

lnNs

cdcNs

cdcName

dataNs

Services

VISIBLE STRING255

AC_DLD_M

AC_DLNDA_M

AC_DLN_M

As defined in Table 45

⎯ 307 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PICS: IEC61850 ASCI Conformance Statement

Client/

subscriber publisher

Server/

GRT10

Remarks

Client-server roles

B11

Server side (of TWO-PARTY-

APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)

Client side of (TWO-PARTY-

APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)

B12

SCSMs supported

B21

B22

B23

B24

SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used

SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used

SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used

SCSM: other

Generic substation event model (GSE)

B31

B32

Publisher side

Subscriber side

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

B41

B42

Publisher side

Subscriber side

If Server side (B11) supported

Logical device

Logical node

Data

Data set

Substitution

Setting group control

Reporting

Buffered report control

sequence-number

report-time-stamp

reason-for-inclusion

data-set-name

data-reference

buffer-overflow

entryID

M7-1

M7-2

M7-3

M7-4

M7-5

M7-6

M7-7

M7-8

M7-9

BufTm

IntgPd

M7-10 GI

Unbuffered report control

M8-1

M8-2

M8-3

M8-4

M8-5

M8-6

M8-7

M8-8

sequence-number

report-time-stamp

reason-for-inclusion

data-set-name

data-reference

BufTm

IntgPd

Logging

Log control

IntgPd

M9-1

M10

M11

Log

Control

If GSE (B31/B32) is supported

GOOSE

M12-1 entryID

⎯ 308 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

M12-2 DataRefInc

M13 GSSE

If SVC (B41/B42) is supported

M14

M15

M16

M17

Server

Multicast SVC

Unicast SVC

Time

File Transfer

ServerDirectory

Application association

Associate

Abort

Release

Logical device

LogicalDeviceDirectory

Logical node

LogicalNodeDirectory

GetAllDataValues

Data

GetDataValues

SetDataValues

GetDataDirectory

GetDataDefinition

S10

S11

Data set

S12

S13

S14

S15

S16

GetDataSetValues

SetDataSetValues

CreateDataSet

DeleteDataSet

GetDataSetDirectory

Substitution

S17

SetDataValues

Setting group control

S18

S19

S20

S21

S22

S23

SelectActiveSG

SelectEditSG

SetSGValues

ConfirmEditSGValues

GetSGValues

GetSGCBValues

Reporting

Buffered report control block (BRCB)

S24

Report

S24-1

S24-2

S24-3

S25

data-change (dchg)

quality-change (qchg)

data-update (dupd)

GetBRCBValues

SetBRCBValues

S26

Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)

S27

Report

S27-1

S27-2

S27-3

S28

data-change (dchg)

quality-change (qchg)

data-update (dupd)

GetURCBValues

SetURCBValues

S29

Logging

Log control block

S30 GetLCBValues

⎯ 309 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

S31

Log

S32

S33

S34

SetLCBValues

QueryLogByTime

QueryLogAfter

GetLogStatusValues

Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK

S35

S36

S37

S38

S39

SendGOOSEMessage

GetGoReference

GetGOOSEElementNumber

GetGoCBValues

SetGoCBValues

GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK

S40

S41

S42

S43

S44

SendGSSEMessage

GetGsReference

GetGSSEElementNumber

GetGsCBValues

SetGsCBValues

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

Multicast SVC

S45

S46

S47

SendMSVMessage

GetMSVCBValues

SetMSVCBValues

c10

Unicast SVC

S48

S49

S50

SendUSVMessage

GetUSVCBValues

SetUSVCBValues

c10

Control

S51

S52

S53

S54

Select

SelectWithValue

Cancel

Operate

CommandTermination

TimeActivatedOperate

S55

S56

File Transfer

S57

S58

S59

S60

Time

GetFile

SetFile

DeleteFile

GetFileAttributeValues

Time resolution of internal clock

Time accuracy of internal clock

Supported TimeStamp resolution

1ms

M – Mandatory

O – Optional

c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.

c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.

c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.

c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been declared.

c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.

c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).

c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)

c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.

⎯ 310 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).

⎯ 311 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

PICS for A-Profile support

Client Server

F/S F/S

A-Profile Profile Description

shortcut

GRT100

Remarks

Client/server A-Profile

GOOSE/GSE

management A-Profile

GSSE A-Profile

TimeSync A-Profile

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.

c2 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 6 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.

c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 9 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.

c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC 61850-8-1.

PICS for T-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description

shortcut

Client

F/S

Server

F/S

GRT100

Remarks

TCP/IP T-Profile

OSI T-Profile

GOOSE/GSE T-Profile

GSSE T-Profile

TimeSync T-Profile

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.

c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.

c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A2 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i.

c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A3 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i.

⎯ 312 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

MMS InitiateRequest general parameters

Client-CR

Server-CR

InitiateRequest

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

InitiateRequest

localDetailCalling

proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling

proposedMaxServOustandingCalled

initRequestDetail

1 or greater

InitiateRequestDetail

proposedVersionNumber

shall be 2.1

proposedParameterCBB

servicesSupportedCalling

additionalSupportedCalling

additionalCbbSupportedCalling

privilegeClassIdentityCalling

c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

MMS InitiateResponse general parameters

Client-CR

Server-CR

InitiateRequest

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

InitiateResponse

localDetailCalled

negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling

negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled

initResponseDetail

1 or greater

InitiateResponseDetail

negotiatedVersionNumber

negotiatedParameterCBB

servicesSupportedCalled

shall be 2.1

additionalSupportedCalled

additionalCbbSupportedCalled

privilegeClassIdentityCalled

c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI

⎯ 313 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

MMS service supported conformance table

Client-CR

Server-CR

MMS service supported CBB

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

status

getNameList

identify

rename

read

write

getVariableAccessAttributes

defineNamedVariable

defineScatteredAccess

getScatteredAccessAttributes

deleteVariableAccess

defineNamedVariableList

getNamedVariableListAttributes

deleteNamedVariableList

defineNamedType

getNamedTypeAttributes

deleteNamedType

input

output

takeControl

relinquishControl

defineSemaphore

deleteSemaphore

reportPoolSemaphoreStatus

reportSemaphoreStatus

initiateDownloadSequence

downloadSegment

terminateDownloadSequence

initiateUploadSequence

uploadSegment

terminateUploadSequence

requestDomainDownload

requestDomainUpload

loadDomainContent

storeDomainContent

deleteDomain

c14

getDomainAttributes

createProgramInvocation

⎯ 314 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Client-CR

Server-CR

MMS service supported CBB

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

deleteProgramInvocation

start

stop

resume

reset

kill

getProgramInvocationAttributes

obtainFile

defineEventCondition

deleteEventCondition

getEventConditionAttributes

reportEventConditionStatus

alterEventConditionMonitoring

triggerEvent

defineEventAction

deleteEventAction

alterEventEnrollment

reportEventEnrollmentStatus

getEventEnrollmentAttributes

acknowledgeEventNotification

getAlarmSummary

getAlarmEnrollmentSummary

readJournal

c13

writeJournal

initializeJournal

reportJournalStatus

createJournal

c12

deleteJournal

fileOpen

fileRead

fileClose

fileRename

fileDelete

c11

fileDirectory

unsolicitedStatus

informationReport

eventNotification

attachToEventCondition

attachToSemaphore

conclude

c10

cancel

getDataExchangeAttributes

exchangeData

c10

⎯ 315 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Client-CR

Server-CR

MMS service supported CBB

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

defineAccessControlList

getAccessControlListAttributes

reportAccessControlledObjects

deleteAccessControlList

alterAccessControl

c10

reconfigureProgramInvocation

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.

c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS

write service is declared.

c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.

c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.

c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.

c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.

c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.

c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.

c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.

c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.

c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.

c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.

c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.

c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.

MMS Parameter CBB

Client-CR

Server-CR

MMS parameter CBB

GRT100

Base

F/S

Value/range Base F/S Value/range

STR1

STR2

NEST

VNAM

VADR

VALT

bit

1 or greater

Y(10)

TPY

VLIS

bit

CEI

ACO

SEM

CSR

CSNC

CSPLC

CSPI

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.

c2 Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.

c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.

c4 Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.

⎯ 316 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GetNameList conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

GetNameList

GRT100

Request

ObjectClass

ObjectScope

DomainName

ContinueAfter

Response+

List Of Identifier

MoreFollows

Response-

Error Type

NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass,

an MMS Reject shall be issued.

AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement

Not applicable.

VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR

Base F/S Value/range

Server-CR

Base F/S Value/range

VariableAccessSpecification

GRT100

listOfVariable

variableSpecification

alternateAccess

variableListName

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.

c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.

VariableSpecification conformance statement

Client-CR

Server-CR

VariableSpecification

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S

Value/range

name

address

variableDescription

scatteredAccessDescription

invalidated

⎯ 317 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Read conformance statement

Client-CR

Server-CR

Base F/S Value/range

Read

GRT100

Base F/S

Value/range

Request

specificationWithResult

variableAccessSpecification

Response

variableAccessSpecification

listOfAccessResult

Write conformance statement

Client-CR

Server-CR

Write

GRT100

Base F/S

Value/range

Base F/S

Value/range

Request

variableAccessSpecification

listOfData

Response

failure

success

InformationReport conformance statement

Client-CR Server-CR

InformationReport

GRT100

Base

F/S

Value/range

Base

F/S

Value/range

Request

variableAccessSpecification

listOfAccessResult

GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement

GetVariableAccessAttribute

Client-CR

Base F/S Value/range

Server-CR

Base F/S Value/range

GRT100

Request

name

address

Response

mmsDeletable

address

typeSpecification

DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement

Not applicable.

⎯ 318 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement

Client-CR

Server-CR

GetNamedVariableListAttributes

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range

Request

ObjectName

Response

mmsDeletable

listOfVariable

variableSpecification

alternateAccess

DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement

ReadJournal conformance statement

Not applicable.

JournalEntry conformance statement

InitializeJournal conformance statement

FileDirectory conformance statement

Client-CR

Server-CR

Value/range

FileDirectory

GRT100

Base F/S Value/range Base F/S

Request

filespecification

continueAfter

Response+

listOfDirectoryEntry

MoreFollows

FileOpen conformance statement

Client-CR

Base F/S

Server-CR

Value/range Base F/S Value/range

FileOpen

GRT100

Request

filename

initialPosition

Response+

frsmID

fileAttributes

⎯ 319 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

FileRead conformance statement

Client-CR

Base F/S

Server-CR

Value/range Base F/S Value/range

FileRead

GRT100

Request

frsmID

Response+

fileData

MoreFollows

FileClose conformance statement

Client-CR

Server-CR

FileClose

GRT100

Base F/S

Value/range Base F/S

Value/range

Request

frsmID

Response+

GOOSE conformance statement

Subscriber

Publisher

Value/comment

GRT100

GOOSE Services

SendGOOSEMessage

GetGoReference

GetGOOSEElementNumber

GetGoCBValues

SetGoCBValues

GSENotSupported

GOOSE Control Block (GoCB)

c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.

c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.

c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.

c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.

c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.

GSSE conformance statement

Not applicable.

⎯ 320 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 321 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix Q

Inverse Time Characteristics

⎯ 322 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

100

TMS

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.01

0.1

100

Current (Multiple of Setting)

Normal Inverse

Very Inverse

⎯ 323 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

1000

100

UK Inverse Curves (LTI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)

1000

100

TMS

1.5

1.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.1

0.01

100

Current (Multiple of Setting)

Extremely Inverse

Long Time Inverse

⎯ 324 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

⎯ 325 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix R

Failed Module Tracing and Replacement

⎯ 326 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

1. Failed module tracing and its replacement

If the “ALARM” LED is ON, the following procedure is recommended. If not repaired, contact

the vendor.

Procedure

Countermeasure

No failure

“ALARM” LED ON?

Not displayed

Contact the vendor.

Press [VIEW] key

Yes

Any LCD messages?

Yes

Not displayed

Press [VIEW] key

Contact the vendor.

Locate the failed module referring to Table R-1.

Locate the failed module.

DC supply “OFF”

Caution: Check that the replacement module has an

identical module name (VCT, SPM, IO1,

IO2, etc.) and hardware type-form as the

failed module. Furthermore, the SPM

module must have the same software

name and version. Refer to Section

4.2.5.1.

Module replacement

DC supply “ON”

As shown in the table, some of the messages cannot

identify the fault location definitely but suggest plural

possible failure locations. In these cases, the failure

location is identified by replacing the suggested

failed modules with spare modules one by one until

the "ALARM" LED is turned off.

“ALARM” LED OFF?

If both “IN SERVICE” LED and “ALARM” LED are

OFF, check the followings.

Check: Is DC supply voltage available with the correct

polarity and of adequate magnitude, and

connected to the correct terminals?

End

⎯ 327 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Table R-1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message

Failure location

VCT

SPM

IO1 or

IO8

IO2

IO3

HMI

LAN

PLC,

cable cable/ IEC61850

network

data

Checksum err

ROM data err

ROM-RAM err

SRAM err

CPU err

Invalid err

NMI err

BU-RAM err

EEPROM err

A/D err

Sampling err

CT1 err

× (2)

× (1)

CT2 err

CT3 err

DIO err

× (1)

RSM err

× (2)

LCD err

DC supply off

RTC err

PCI err

LAN err

GOOSE stop

Ping err

× (2)

× (1)

×(1)

PLC stop

MAP stop

No-working of

LCD

× (2)

× (1)

Note: This table shows the relationship between messages displayed on the LCD

and the estimated failure location. Locations marked with (1) have a higher

probability than locations marked with (2).

⎯ 328 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

2. Methods of Replacing the Modules

CAUTION

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed

wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many

of the electronic components could suffer damage.

CAUTION

After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the data

related the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.

The initial replacement procedure is as follows:

1). Switch off the DC power supply.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the

DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2). Remove the front panel cover.

3). Open the front panel.

Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the

front panel.

Case size : 1/2”inchs

4). Detach the holding bar.

Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the

bar.

⎯ 329 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

5). Unplug the cables.

Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of black

connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the connector.

Gray connector

Black connector

6). Pull out the module.

Pull out the failure module by pulling up or down the top and bottom levers (white).

SPM module

7). Insert the replacement module.

Insert the replacement module into the same slots where marked up.

8). Do the No.5 to No.1 steps in reverse order.

CAUTION

Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original

positions and the ribbon cables are plugged in. If the ribbon cables are not

plugged in enough (especially the gray connectors), the module could suffer

damage.

Details of the gray connector on modules (top side)

○Enough

×Not enough

⎯ 330 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

9). Lamp Test

RESET

•

key is pushed 1 second or more by LCD display off.

•

It checks that all LCDs and LEDs light on.

10). Check the automatic supervision functions.

•

LCD not display “Auto-supervision” screens in turn, and Event Records

Checking the “IN SERVICE” LED light on and “ALARM LED” light off.

⎯ 331 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Appendix S

Ordering

⎯ 332 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Ordering

GRT100

Model 100 series

Type:

Transformer protection Relay

Model:

GRT100

-Model 100 series: 2 three-phase current inputs for

2-winding transformer

- 16 BIs, 13 BOs, 5 trip BOs

- 16 BIs, 23 BOs, 5 trip BOs

101

102

CT Rating:

1A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc

1A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc

1A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

1A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc

CT Rating-2:

Single CT Rating

Mix, Primary:1A, Secondary: 5A

Mix, Primary:5A, Secondary: 1A

Communications:

RS485 + 100BASE-TX

RS485 + 100BASE-FX

Fibre optic + 100BASE-FX

Miscellaneous:

None

LED label:

Standard

None

Option: User configurable LED label

Note: Please inform us which is ordered panel surface mount type or 19-inch rack mount type.

In 19 inch rack mount type, please order optional attachment kit.

- for relay case Type-A attachment kit: EP101

⎯ 333 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

GRT100

Model 200 series

Type:

Transformer protection Relay

Model:

GRT100

-Model 200 series: 3 three-phase current inputs for

3-winding transformer

- 16 BIs, 13 BOs, 5 trip BOs

- 16 BIs, 23 BOs, 5 trip BOs

- 15 BIs (12-independent), 13 BOs, 3 trip BOs

- 15 BIs (12-independent), 23 BOs, 3 trip BOs

CT Rating:

201

202

203

204

1A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc

1A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc

1A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

1A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc

1A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc

5A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc

5A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc

Mix, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc

Mix, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc

CT Rating-2:

Single CT Rating

Mix, Primary:1A, Secondary:5A, Tertiary:5A

Mix, Primary:5A, Secondary:1A, Tertiary:5A

Mix, Primary:1A, Secondary:1A, Tertiary:5A

Communications:

RS485 + 100BASE-TX

RS485 + 100BASE-FX

Fibre optic + 100BASE-FX

Miscellaneous:

None

LED label:

Standard

None

Option: User configurable LED label

Note: Please inform us which is ordered panel surface mount type or 19-inch rack mount type.

In 19 inch rack mount type, please order optional attachment kit.

- for relay case Type-A attachment kit: EP101

⎯ 334 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 7

Version-up Records

Version

No.

Date

Revised Section

Contents

0.0

1.0

Sep. 12, 2007

Apr. 14, 2008

2.2.2

3.1.3

First issue

Modified the description and Figure 2.2.2.1.

Modified the description.

4.2.6.4, 4.2.6.6

4.4.2

Modified the description.

Precaution

4.2.2,4.2.6.2,4.2.7

Appendixes

2.2.5

Modified the description of ‘Disposal’.

Modified the description.(Add explanation of password for test screen.)

Modified Appendix E and S.

2.0

3.0

Jul. 31, 2009

Oct. 16, 2009

Modified the description and Table numbers.

2.3

Modified Figure 2.3.3. (Add “ ON” under the scheme switch)

2.5

Modified the description and Figure 2.5.1. (Add “ ON” under the scheme

switch)

Modified Figure 2.9.1. (Add “ ON” under the scheme switch)

Modified the description

2.9

2.10.6

3.1.3

Modified Appendix N.

Appendix

2.2.1

4.0

Dec. 11, 2009

Modified Table 2.2.1.1 and Figure 2.2.1.4.

⎯ 335 ⎯

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Taylor Juicer AJ 1450 BL User Manual
Texas Instruments Stereo System TMS320C2801 User Manual
Toyota Stove DTC P0135 User Manual
Tripp Lite Network Cables N002 020 GY User Manual
Troy Bilt Trimmer TB25CS User Manual
U Line Refrigerator 2075DWRR User Manual
United States Stove Furnace 1600EF User Manual
Vector Automobile Battery Charger VEC078 User Manual
ViewEra Computer Monitor V195MV User Manual
ViewSonic Projector PJ559D User Manual